Mec R2018

SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

SRIPERUMBUDUR TK - 602 117
REGULATION – 2018
B.E. Mechanical Engineering
Choice Based Credit System
I-VIII Semesters CURRICULUM
COURSE CONTACT Fixed/

S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C Prerequisites
CODE PERIODS Movable
THEORY
Communicative English
1 HS18151 HS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
(Common to All Branches)
Engineering Mathematics
2 MA18151 I (Common to All BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Branches except MR)
Engineering Physics
3 PH18151 BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Engineering Chemistry
4 CY18151 (Common to All Branches BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
except MR)
Basic Electrical and
5 EE18151 Electronics Engineering ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
(common to AE, BT, CE,
CS, IT, MR & ME)
Engineering Drawing
6 GE18151 ES 5 3 0 2 4 Nil F
PRACTICAL
Physics and Chemistry
1 PC18161 Laboratory (Common to BS 2 0 0 2 1 Nil F
All Branches)
Engineering Practices
GE18161
2 Laboratory (Common to ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
All Branches)
TOTAL 26 18 1 7 22.5 - -
(Recommended by BoS - Meeting held on 28.07.2018)
1
SEMESTER II
THEORY
Technical English (Common
1 HS18251 HS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
to All Branches)
Engineering Mathematics II
2 MA18251 (Common to All Branches BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Except MR)
Programming for Problem
3 IT18101 Solving (Common to All ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Branches Except MR)
Environmental Science and
4 GE18251 Engineering (Common to BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
All Branches)
Engineering Mechanics
5 ME18201 ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
(Common to ME & MR)
6 PH18253 Material Science BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
PRACTICAL
Programming for Problem
1 IT18111 Solving Laboratory (Common ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
to All Branches except MR)
2 ME18211 Machine Drawing Laboratory PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
TOTAL 25 18 1 6 22 - -
SEMESTER III
THEORY
Engineering Mathematics –
1 MA18351 III (Common to BT, CH, CE, BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
EE, EC, ME)
Engineering
2 ME18301 PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Thermodynamics
3 ME18302 Manufacturing Processes PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Material Characterization
4 ME18303 PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
and Metallurgy
5 ME18304 Mechanics of Solids ES 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Electrical Drives and Control
6 EE18352 ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Systems
PRACTICAL
Electrical and Electronics
1 EE18361 ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Engineering Laboratory
Manufacturing Processes
2 ME18311 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Laboratory
Material Testing and
3 ME18312 ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Metallurgy Laboratory
TOTAL 30 18 3 9 25.5 - -
2
SEMESTER IV
THEORY
Computational Methods
1 MA18451 (Common to CH, CE, EE, BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
MR & ME)
2 ME18401 Thermal Engineering PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18301 F
Machine Tools and
3 ME18402 PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Machining Processes
4 ME18403 Kinematics of Machinery PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Hydraulics and Pneumatics
5 ME18404 Systems (Common to ME & PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
AE)
Fluid Mechanics and
6 ME18405 ES 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Machinery
PRACTICAL
Fluid Mechanics and
1 ME18411 Machinery laboratory ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
(Common to ME & AE)
Metal Machining
2 ME18412 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Laboratory
Thermal Engineering
3 ME18413 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Laboratory
TOTAL 30 17 4 9 25.5 - -
SEMESTER V
THEORY
Metrology and Quality
1 ME18501 PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Control
2 ME18502 Dynamics of Machinery PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18403 F
Design of Machine
3 ME18503 PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
Elements
ME18301
4 ME18504 Heat and Mass Transfer PC 4 3 1 0 4 F
ME18401
5 Professional Elective - I PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
6 Open Elective - I OE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
PRACTICAL
Dynamics and Vibrations
1 ME18511 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Laboratory
Metrology and
2 ME18512 PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
Instrumentation Laboratory
Heat Transfer,
3 ME18513 Refrigeration & Air PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F
conditioning Laboratory
TOTAL 30 18 3 9 25.5 - -
3
SEMESTER VI
THEORY
Computer Aided Design
1 ME18601 PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
and Manufacturing
Design of Transmission
2 ME18602 PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18503 F
Systems
Gas Dynamics and Jet
3 ME18603 PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME 18301 F
Propulsion
4 Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
5 Professional Elective – III PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
6 Open Elective – II OE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
PRACTICAL
Design and Fabrication
1 ME18611 EEC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F
Project
Computer Aided Design
2 ME18612 and Manufacturing PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F
Laboratory
Interview and Career Skills
Laboratory (Common to
3 HS18561 EEC 3 0 0 3 2 Nil F
all branches except BT &
EE)
TOTAL 31 18 2 11 26 - -
(Recommended by BoS – Meeting held on 23.02.2019)
SEMESTER VII
THEORY
ME 18304
1 ME18701 Finite Element Analysis PC 4 3 1 0 4 F
ME 18401
Computer Integrated
2 ME18702 PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F
Manufacturing
3 ME18703 Mechatronics PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F
4 Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
5 Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M
PRACTICAL
1 ME18711 Comprehension EEC 2 0 0 2 1 F

Nil
Finite Element Analysis
2 ME18712 PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F
and Simulation Laboratory
2 ME18713 Mechatronics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F
TOTAL 27 15 2 10 22 - -
4
SEMESTER VIII
THEORY
1. Professional Elective – VI PE 3 3 0 0 0 Nil M
PRACTICAL
1 ME18811 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12 Nil F

TOTAL 27 3 0 24 15 - -
Total Credits = 22.5+22+25.5+25.5+25.5+26+22+15 = 184
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I, IV, V (To be chosen during ODD SEMESTER)

COURSE
S.NO. COURSE TITLE
CODE
1 ME18001 Automobile Engineering

2 ME18003 Bio Materials
3 ME18005 Composite Materials and Mechanics (Common to ME & AE)
4 ME18007 Design for Manufacturing and Assembly
5 ME18009 Design of Heat Exchangers
6 ME18011 Energy Conservation and Waste Heat Recovery
7 ME18013 Enterprise Resource Planning
8 CS18052 Fundamentals of Artificial Intelligence (Common to EE & ME)
9 GE18051 Intellectual Property Rights (Common to all Branches except BT)
10 ME18015 Lean Six Sigma
11 ME18017 Mechanical Vibrations and Noise Control
12 ME18019 Non Destructive Testing and Evaluation
13 ME18021 Plant Layout Design and Ergonomics
14 ME18023 Power Plant Engineering
15 GE18551 Principles of Management (Common to EC, AE, BT, EE & ME)
16 ME18025 Process planning and Cost Estimation
17 ME18027 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
18 ME18029 Renewable Energy Resources (Common to ME & MR)
19 ME18031 Surface Engineering and Tribology
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II, III, VI (To be chosen during EVEN SEMESTER)

COURSE
S.NO. COURSE TITLE
CODE
1 ME18002 3D Printing and Design

2 ME18004 Advanced I.C. Engines
3 ME18006 Automobile Electronics
5
4 ME18008 Biogas Engineering
5 ME18010 Computational Fluid Dynamics (Common to ME & AE)
6 ME18012 Design of Experiments (Common to ME, AE, CE & CH)
7 ME18014 Digital Manufacturing
8 ME18016 Engineering Economic Analysis
9 ME18018 Entrepreneurship Development
10 AE18602 Hybrid and Electric Vehicles (Common to AE and ME)
11 ME18020 Industrial Robotics (Common to ME, AE, & MR)
12 ME18022 Industrial Safety, Maintenance and Ethics
13 ME18024 Micro Controllers and Embedded System
14 ME18026 Operations Research (Common to ME, AE & CH)
15 ME18028 Nanomaterials
16 ME18030 Product Design and Development
17 ME18032 Sensors for Automation
18 ME18034 Thermal Turbo Machines
19 GE18052 Total Quality Management
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (Can be chosen whenever offered)

COURSE
S.NO. COURSE TITLE
CODE
1. SE18001 Mathematics for AI and ML (Common to all branches except MR)

2. SE18002 Corporate Finance (Common to all branches except MR)
3. SE18003 Financial Statement Analysis (Common to all branches except MR)
4. SE18004 Managerial Economics (Common to all branches except MR)
5. SE18005 Market Research (Common to all branches except MR)
6. SE18006 Production Management (Common to all branches except MR)
7. SE18007 Project Management (Common to all branches except MR)
8. SE18008 Introduction to Securities Market (Common to all branches except MR)
9. SE18009 Supply Chain Management (Common to all branches except MR)
OPEN ELECTIVE – I
(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Odd Semester)
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE HOURS
1. OE18001 Basics of Mechanical Engineering OE 3 3 0 0 3
2. OE18003 Elements of Mechanical Components OE 3 3 0 0 3
Industrial Engineering and
3. OE18005 OE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
4. OE18007 Basics of Energy Resources OE 3 3 0 0 3
6
OPEN ELECTIVE – II
(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Even Semester)
COURSE CONTACT
CODE HOURS
1. OE18002 Elements of Automation OE 3 3 0 0 3
2. OE18004 Quality concepts and tools OE 3 3 0 0 3

Refrigeration and Air conditioning
3. OE18006 OE 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
Thermal Management of Electronics
4. OE18008 OE 3 3 0 0 3
devices
Value Added Courses

(To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)
COURSE CONTACT
CODE HOURS
Advanced Gear Manufacturing
1 VD18001 VA 2 2 0 0 2
Concepts
Condition Monitoring of Machine
2 VD18002 VA 2 2 0 0 2
Tools
Design and Development of Jigs and
3 VD18003 VA 2 2 0 0 2
Fixtures
Design and Development of Press
4 VD18004 VA 2 2 0 2 2
Tools
5 VD18005 Engine Instrumentation and Testing VA 2 2 0 0 2
Geometrical Dimensioning and
6 VD18006 VA 2 2 0 0 2
Tolerance
7 VD18007 Kaizen and its Applications VA 2 2 0 0 2
Kinematic Analysis of Mechanical
8 VD18008 VA 2 2 0 0 2
Links
Communicative German (Common
9 VC18001 VA 2 2 0 0 2
to all branches except MR)
Communicative Japanese (Common
10 VC18002 VA 2 2 0 0 2
to all branches except MR)
Communicative Hindi (Common to
11 VC18003 VA 2 2 0 0 2
all branches except MR)
Design Thinking and Prototyping
12 VC18004 Laboratory (Common to All VA 2 2 0 2 2
Branches)
Basics of Entrepreneurship
13 VC18005 Development (Common to All
Branches)
7
Mandatory Courses
COURSE CONTACT
CODE HOURS
Indian Constitution and Society
1. MC18001 (Common to all branches except MC 3 3 0 0 3
MR)
OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY OTHER DEPARTMENT
Open Electives offered in ODD Semester

SL. COURSE Offering
COURSE TITLE
NO. CODE Department
1. OE181001 Fundamentals of Automobile Engineering AUT
2. OE181003 Fundamentals of Automotive Air Conditioning AUT
3. OE18201 Introduction to Biofuels and Bioenergy BIO

4. OE18203 Basics of Environmental Biotechnology BIO
5. OE18205 Introduction to Bioinformatics and Computational Biology BIO

6. OE18207 Basics of Nanobiotechnology BIO
7. OE18209 Introduction to Biomaterials BIO
8. OE18301 Waste to Energy CHE
9. OE18303 Industrial Safety CHE
10. OE18305 Composite Materials CHE

11. OE18307 Industrial Waste Water Treatment CHE
12. OE18309 Fuel Cell Technology CHE
13. OE18401 Basic Civil Engineering CVE
14. OE18403 Fundamentals of Remote Sensing and GIS CVE
15. OE18501 Basic Operating System CSE
16. OE18503 Basics on Cyber Security and Ethical Hacking CSE
17. OE18505 Introduction to Internet of Things CSE
18. OE18507 Multimedia & Animation Techniques CSE
19. OE18509 Python Programming CSE
20. OE18601 Electrical Machines and Applications EEE
21. OE18603 Control system Engineering EEE

22. OE18605 Micro and Smart Grid EEE
23. OE18607 Electric Vehicle Technology EEE
8
24. OE18609 Nano-technology EEE
25. OE18701 Autotronics ECE
26. OE18703 Sensing Techniques ECE

27. OE18705 System Design using Microcontrollers ECE
28. OE18801 IT essentials for engineers INT
29. OE18803 Internet of Everything INT
30. OE18805 Foundation on Mobile App Development INT
31. OE18901 Elements of Marine Engineering MAR
32. OE18903 Marine Propulsion MAR

33. OE18001 Basics of Mechanical Engineering MEC
34. OE18003 Elements of Mechanical Components MEC
35. OE18005 Industrial Engineering and Management MEC

36. OE18007 Basics of Energy Resources MEC
Open Electives offered in EVEN Semester

SL. COURSE Offering
COURSE TITLE
NO. CODE Department
1. OE18102 Automotive Fault Diagnostics AUT
2. OE18104 Fundamentals of Automotive Safety and Maintenance AUT
3. OE18106 Fundamentals of Automotive Pollution and Control Methods AUT
4. OE18202 Introduction to Food Manufacturing BIO

5. OE18204 Testing of Biological Materials BIO
6. OE18206 Introduction to Tissue Engineering BIO

7. OE18208 Introduction to Cancer Biology BIO
8. OE18210 Basic Bio-pharmaceutical Technology BIO

9. OE18302 Industrial Pollution Prevention CHE
10. OE18304 Solid Waste Management CHE
11. OE18306 Plant Utilities CHE
12. OE18308 Green Energy CHE
13. OE18310 Energy Management CHE
14. OE18402 Integrated Solid Waste Management CVE

15. OE18404 Life Cycle Assessment CVE
16. OE18502 Artificial Intelligence Basics CSE
9
17. OE18504 Database Systems and Applications CSE
18. OE18506 Internet Programming CSE
19. OE18508 Introduction to Cloud & Big Data Analytics CSE

20. OE18510 Introduction to Data Structures CSE
21. OE18602 Industrial Automation EEE
22. OE18604 MEMS and Nano Devices EEE
23. OE18606 Renewable Energy Systems EEE
24. OE18608 Indian Power Grid EEE
25. OE18610 Power Converters EEE
26. OE18702 Consumer Electronics ECE
27. OE18704 Introduction to Communication Systems ECE

28. OE18706 Robotics Systems ECE
29. OE18802 Embedded and Real Time Systems INT

30. OE18804 Ethical hacking and IT security INT
31. OE18806 User Interface Design INT
32. OE18808 AI for Android INT

33. OE18902 Introduction to Marine Diesel Engines and machineries MAR
34. OE18904 Marine Vehicles MAR
35. OE18002 Elements of Automation MEC
36. OE18004 Quality concepts and tools MEC
37. OE18006 Refrigeration and Air conditioning Systems MEC

38. OE18008 Thermal Management of Electronics devices MEC
OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY HUMANATIES AND SCIENCE DEPARTMENTS

1. OP18001 Sensors and Transducers APH
2. OP18002 Essential Properties for Selection of Materials APH
3. OP18003 Opto Electronics and applications APH
4. OP18004 Basics of Environmental Safety APH
5. OH18001 Gender sensitization and Social Impact HSS
6. OH18002 Content Writing HSS

7. OH18003 Critical Thinking HSS
8. OH18004 Environmental Law, Policy and International Conventions HSS
10
9. OH18005 Urban / Rural Development and Constitutional Provisions HSS
10. OH18006 Climate Change and Vulnerability Assessment HSS
11. OC18001 Advanced Engineering Chemistry ACH

12. OC18002 Industrial Chemistry ACH
13. OC18003 Chemistry in Food Industry ACH

14. OC18004 Fuel cell Chemistry ACH
15. OC18005 Waste water Treatment ACH
16. OM18001 Statistical methods for Engineers AMA
17. OM18002 Linear Programming AMA

18. OM18003 Linear Algebra for Engineers AMA
19. OM18004 Transform techniques for Boundary value problems AMA

Mechanical Engineering Students can choose Open Electives offered only by other departments
Summary
SL. CREDITS IN SEMESTER Total

CATEGORY
NO. I II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits
Humanities and Social Sciences

1 3 3 6
including Management courses (HS)
2 Basic Science courses (BS) 11 10 4 3 28
Engineering Science courses including

workshop, drawing, basics of
3 8.5 7.5 10 5.5 31.5
electrical/mechanical/computer etc
(ES)
4 Professional Core courses (PC) 1.5 11.5 17 19.5 13 15 77.5
Professional Elective courses relevant

5 3 6 6 3 18
to chosen specialization/branch (PE)
Open subjects - Electives from other

6 technical and /or emerging subjects 3 3 6
(OE)
Project work, seminar and internship

7 4 1 12 17
in industry or elsewhere (EEC)
Mandatory Courses
8 0 0
(MC)
Total 22.5 22 25.5 25.5 25.5 26 22 15 184
11
Online Courses
1. Students may be permitted to credit three online course (which is provided with certificate) subject to a
maximum of three credits. The approved list of online courses will be provided by the Department
Consultative Committee from time to time.
2. The student needs to obtain certification or credit to become eligible for appear for oral examination to be
conducted by Department of Mechanical Engineering.
3. The student can drop any three, 3 credit Professional Elective course on successful completion of online
course (which should be 12-week duration).
4. If the student has failed in the online course conducted by the external / organizing agency, the oral
examination will not be conducted.
Internship / Industrial Visit
(Mandatory)
1. The students should undergo Industrial training / Internship for a period of 2 to 4 weeks during summer
/ winter vacation and should earn a minimum of 1 credit or a maximum of 2 credits.
2. The Internship / Industrial training to be completed between 4th to 6th semester
3. The students may undergo Internship at Research organization / University (after due approval from the
Department Consultative Committee) for a period prescribed in the curriculum during summer / winter
vacation, in lieu of Industrial training.
12
SEMESTER - I
HS18151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH L T P C

(Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable learners to interact fluently on everyday social contexts.
• To enable learners to engage in conversations in an academic/scholarly setting.
• To enable learners to overcome public speaking barriers.
• To develop learners’ ability to take notes and in the process, improve their listening skills
• To develop learners’ reading skill through reading text passages for comprehension and
contemplation.
• To enable learners to write on topics of general interest and drafting correspondences for
general purposes.
UNIT I 9
Listening - short video clips - conversational scenes form movies, celebrities’ speeches/interviews.
Speaking - several ways of introducing oneself at several situations, introducing others at several
situations, inviting people for several occasions, describing people and their places. Reading -
short comprehension passages - making inferences, critical analysis. Writing - completing the
incomplete sentences - developing hints from the given information. Grammar - Wh-Questions
and Yes or No questions - Parts of speech. Vocabulary development - prefixes - suffixes - articles -
countable / uncountable nouns.
UNIT II 9
Listening - customer care voice files, short narratives - identifying problems and developing
telephone etiquettes. Speaking - speaking over skype/WhatsApp, making business calls, making
self-recorded informative videos, inquiring about a concept/activity, describing a concept/activity.
Reading - reading the headlines on news magazines - slogans and taglines from advertisements.
Writing - free writing - writing - headlines, slogans and taglines individual inspirations. Grammar -
conjunctions, idioms, phrases, quotes. Vocabulary development - guessing the meanings of words
in various different contexts.
UNIT III 9
Listening - courtroom scenes from movies, debates and talks from news channels, notes taking.
Speaking - language and tone for arguments, discussion, deliberation, contemplation, expressing
opinions, reacting to different situations in an alien country. Reading - language used in instruction
manuals of household appliances, cookery and other basic instructions. Writing- understanding the
structure of texts - use of reference words, discourse markers-coherence, rearranging the jumbled
sentences. Grammar - adjectives - degrees of comparison, framing direct and indirect questions.
Vocabulary development - concise approach, single word substitution.
UNIT IV 9
Listening - Sports commentaries, advertisements with users’ criticisms; Speaking - for social
causes, for promoting a concept, negotiating and bargaining; Reading - review of a product, movie,
movement or a system; Writing - writing for advertisements, selling a product; Grammar - Tenses
- Simple Past, Present and Future, Continuous - Past, Present and Future; Vocabulary
Development - synonyms, antonyms and phrasal verbs.
13
UNIT V 9
Listening - video lectures, video demonstration of a concept; Speaking - presenting
papers/concepts, delivering short speeches, discourses on health, suggesting natural home
remedies, cleanliness, civic sense and responsibilities; Reading - columns and articles on home
science; Writing - correspondences of requests, basic enquiry/observation and basic complaints;
Grammar - modal verbs, perfect tenses - Vocabulary development - collocations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Assessment:
• 3 Continuous assessments (reading, writing, grammar, and 3 assignments (1 assignment
focuses on listening 2 assignments focus on speaking; evaluation of students’ speeches and
recorded clippings)
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to
• Read articles and infer meanings from specific contexts from magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal/casual conversations; introduce themselves and their
friends and express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English.
• Write short write-ups and personal letters and emails in English.
REFERENCES:
1. Department of English, Anna University, Mindscapes : English for Technologists and
Engineers. Orient Black Swan, Chennai, 2017.
2. Downes and Colm, "Cambridge English for Job-hunting", Cambridge University Press, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. Murphy and Raymond, "Intermediate English Grammar with Answers", Cambridge University
Press, 2000.
4. Thomson, A.J., "Practical English Grammar 1 & 2", Oxford, 1986.
Websites
1. http://www.usingenglish.com
2. http://www.uefap.com3
3. https://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/
4. www.learnenglishfeelgood.com/esl-printables-worksheets.html
Software
1. Face 2 Face Advance – Cambridge University Press, 2014.
2. English Advance Vocabulary- Cambridge University Press.
3. IELTS test preparation – Cambridge University Press 2017.
4. Official Guide to the TOEFL Test With CD-ROM, 4th Edition.
5. CAMBRIDGE Preparation for the TOEFL TEST- Cambridge University Press, 2017.
14
MA18151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I L T P C
(Common to all Branches Except MR) 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand and apply matrix techniques for engineering applications.
• To make the student knowledgeable in statistical methods of analyzing and interpret the
data for engineering problems.
• To familiarize the student with basic calculus including functions of several variables.
This is needed in many branches of engineering.
• To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals
and their usage.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix - Characteristic equation - Properties of Eigen
values and Eigen vectors - Statement and Applications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem -
Diagonalization of matrices - Reduction of a quadratic form into canonical form by orthogonal
transformation - Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II STATISTICAL METHODS 12

Scatter diagram - Karl Pearson coefficient of correlation for raw data - Spermann rank correlation
coefficient - lines of regression - Regression equation X on Y and Y on X- Curve fitting by
Principle of least squares - Fitting a straight line and a parabola .
UNIT III APPLICATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates - Centre and radius of curvature - Circle of curvature -
Evolutes - Envelopes.
UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Limits and Continuity - Partial derivatives - Total derivatives - Differentiation of implicit functions
- Jacobians and properties - Taylor’s series for functions of two variables - Maxima and Minima of
functions of two variables - Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates - Change of order of integration - Area
enclosed by plane curves - Change of variables in double integrals - Triple integrals - Volume of
solids.
TOTAL (L:45 + T:15) : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Develop the use of matrix algebra techniques which is needed for practical applications.
2. Apply the skill to solve statistical problems under correlation and regression and acquire
the knowledge for fitting the straight line and parabola.
3. Acquire the skills to evaluate the functions of several variables.
4. Express proficiency in handling the concept of improper integrals of gamma, beta and error
functions
5. Acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their usage
15
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, " Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 8th Edition, John Wiley, 1999.
2. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Text book of Engineering Mathematics", Eighth Edition,
Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
st
3. Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 41 Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,
2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Gupta S.C and Kapoor V.K, "Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics", S. Chand Private
Ltd.,11th Edition, 2005.
2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V.O’Neil, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2008.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., "Engineering Mathematics", Volume I,
Second Edition, Pearson Publishing, 2011.
16
PH18151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
• To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 12

Unit cell - Bravais Lattices - Miller indices - Distance between Inter planar distance ‘d’
(derivation) - discussion of various crystal structures: calculation of Atomic radius, Coordination
number, effective number of lattice points and Atomic Packing Factor for the SC, BCC, FCC,
HCP, Diamond Cubic (derivation) - discussion about the NaCl, Graphite structures. Crystal defects
: Zero dimensional, one dimensional, Two dimensional and Three dimensional defects. Diffraction
of X-rays by crystal planes - Bragg’s spectrometer - Powder Diffraction method.
UNIT II THERMAL PHYSICS 6

Modes of heat transfer: Newton’s law of cooling - thermal conductivity - Lee’s disc method
(derivation and expt) - Radial heat flow - Rubber tube method - conduction through compound
media (series and parallel).
UNIT III WAVE MECHANICS 9

Quantum principles: Black body radiation - Planck Hypothesis (qualitative), Compton’s effect
(derivation).
Wave-particle duality - De-Broglie matter waves - Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle - Wave
function and its significance - Schrödinger’s wave equation (time dependent and Time
independent) (derivation) - Application of Schrodinger’s wave equation - Particle in one
dimensional box (derivation ) - Degenerate and non-degenerate energy states.
UNIT IV ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

Acoustics: Classification of Sound - Characteristics of Musical Sound - Quality (Timbre), Pitch,
Intensity of Sound - Units of Sound - decibel - Reverberation of sound - Reverberation time -
absorption of sound energy by materials - Absorption coefficient - Sabine’s Formula (derivation) -
Factors affecting the acoustics of buildings - Remedies.
Ultrasonics : Introduction to ultrasonics - Properties of ultrasonic waves - Production of
Ultrasonics - Magnetostriction method, Piezo electric method - detection of ultrasonics -
Ultrasonic Acoustic grating - Applications of ultrasonic waves - SONAR, NDT, Sonogram.
UNIT V OPTOELECTRONICS AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Lasers: Basic properties of Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients (Derivation) - Population inversion -
Types of Lasers - Molecular Gas Lasers (CO2 Laser) - Solid state Laser (Nd: YAG Laser) -
Applications of Lasers in Engineering and Medicine.
Fibre optics: Introduction - Principle and structure of optical fibers - Acceptance angle-Numerical
aperture-Types of optical fibers-Optical fiber communication system (block diagram) -
Advantages and its applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
• Interpret the thermal properties of the materials.
• Exhibit the ability to solve the problems pertaining to the behavior of sub-atomic particles using
17
quantum mechanics.
• Learn to solve the issues related to defects in the buildings due to acoustic design
• Develop an understanding about photonics and Fiber Optic communication system
• Classify and demonstrate the fundamentals of crystals and their defects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L, "Engineering Physics", Dhanpat Publications, 2015.
2. Shatendra Sharma and Jyotsna Sharma, "Engineering Physics”, Pearson, 2006.
3. Rajendran V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. Arumugam M, "Materials Science", Anuradha Publications, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. David Halliday, Robert Resnick Jearl Walker, "Principles of Physics", 10th Edition, Wiley,
2015.
2. Peter Atkins and Julio De Paula, "Physical Chemistry", 10th Edition., Oxford University Press,
2014.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan and Rai Choudhury S, "Concepts of Modern Physics", 7th
Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
4. Raghavan V, "Materials Science and Engineering", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
18
CY18151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and
the water treatment techniques.
• To develop an understanding the principle, types and mechanism of corrosion and
protective coatings.
• To acquaint the students with the basics of nanomaterials, their properties and applicants.
• To develop an understanding of the laws of photochemistry and basic spectral (UV and IR)
analysis.
• To enable the students to understand the types of fuels, its calorific values and the
significance flue gas analysis.
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Sources, hard & soft water, estimation of hardness by EDTA method, boiler feed water, boiler
problems, cause and preventive measures, softening of water, zeolite process & demineralization
by ion exchangers, internal treatment methods, specifications for drinking water, BIS & WHO
standards, treatment of water for domestic use, desalination - reverse osmosis & electrodialysis.
UNIT II CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Corrosion: Basic concepts - mechanism of chemical, electrochemical corrosion - Pilling Bedworth
rule – Types of Electrochemical corrosion - galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion -
pitting corrosion – stress corrosion – factors influencing corrosion. Corrosion control: Cathodic
protection – sacrificial anodic method - corrosion inhibitors. Protective coatings: surface
preparation For metallic coatings - electro plating (copper plating) and electroless plating (Nickel
plating) - chemical conversion coatings - anodizing, phosphating & chromate coating.
UNIT III NANOCHEMISTRY 9

Basics - distinction between molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials; size-dependent
properties. nanoparticles: nano cluster, nano rod, nanotube (CNT) and nanowire. Synthesis:
precipitation, thermolysis, hydrothermal, solvothermal, electrodeposition, chemical vapour
deposition, laser ablation; Properties and applications of nanomaterials.
UNIT IV PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY 9

Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grotthuss - Draper law, Stark-Einstein law and
Lambert Beer Law. Quantum efficiency - Photo processes - Internal Conversion, Inter-system
crossing, Fluorescence, Phosphorescence and Photo-sensitization. Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic
spectrum - Absorption of radiation - Electronic, Vibrational and rotational transitions. UV-visible
and IR spectroscopy - principles, instrumentation (Block diagram only) and applications.
UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuel: Introduction - classification of fuels - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values - coal
analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) - carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto
Hoffmann method) - petroleum- refining - manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) -
knocking octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG)
- liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - producer gas - water gas. Combustion of fuels: introduction -
theoretical calculation of calorific value - calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and air ratio - flue
gas analysis by ORSAT Method.
19
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Estimate the hardness of water, asses the boiler feed water requirement and related
problems also identification of suitable water treatment methods.
• Differentiate the mechanisms of different types of corrosion and suggest suitable corrosion
control techniques to mitigate the problem of corrosion including protective coatings.
• Compare the nano and bulk materials, their synthesis and its applications in various fields.
• Interpret the photochemical reactions and spectroscopic techniques.
• Assess the types and quality of fuels, its calorific values and significance of flue gas
analysis.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain P.C. and Monica Jain, "Engineering Chemistry", Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. Dara S.S, Umare S.S, "Engineering Chemistry", S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
3. Sivasankar B., "Engineering Chemistry", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Ozin G. A. and Arsenault A. C., "Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials",
RSC Publishing, 2005.
2. B.R. Puri, L.R. Sharma, M.S. Pathania., "Principles of Physical Chemistry", Vishal Publishing
Company, 2008.
20
EE18151 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
(Common to AE, BT, CE, CS, IT, MR & ME) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basic theorems used in Electrical circuits and the principles of
measuring instruments.
• To educate the different concepts and function of electrical machines.
• To introduce the fundamentals of semiconductor and applications.
• To explain the principles of digital electronics.
• To impart knowledge of communication.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 10

Ohm’s Law - Kirchhoff’s Laws - Steady State Solution of DC Circuits using Mesh Analysis -
Introduction to AC Circuits - Waveforms and RMS Value - Power and Power factor - Single Phase
and Three Phase AC Balanced Circuits. Construction and working Principle of Moving Coil and
Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy
meters (Qualitative treatment only).
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 10

Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators, DC
Motors, Single phase induction Motor, Single Phase Transformer.
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 9

Characteristics of PN Junction Diode - Zener Effect - Zener Diode - LED, Photo diode and its
Characteristics - Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers - Voltage Regulation. Bipolar Junction
Transistor - CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics - Photo transistors.
UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9

Binary Number System - Logic Gates - Boolean Algebra - Half and Full Adders - Flip-Flops -
Registers and Counters - A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts).
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 7

Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals - Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of
Amplitude and Frequency Modulations.
Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fiber (Block Diagram
Approach only)..
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Study the fundamental laws governing electrical circuits and to describe the working of
• Understand the construction and characteristics of different electrical machines.
• Describe the fundamental behavior of different semiconductor devices and circuits.
• Learn the fundamental concepts of digital electronics circuits.
• Recognize the type of signals, data transfer and able to apply in communication systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mittle V.N, Arvind Mittal, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill(India), Second
Edition, 2013.
21
2. Sedha R.S., "A Text Book of Applied Electronics", S. Chand & Co., 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, "Basic Electrical, Electronics
Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. I.J. Nagrath and D.P. Kothari, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill ((India),
Third Edition, 2010.
3. Mehta V K, "Principles of Electronics", S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2010.
4. M. Morris Mano, "Digital Logic & Computer Engineering", Printice Hall of India, 2004.
5. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, "Electric Circuits", Schaum' Outline Series,
McGraw Hill, Fourth Edition, 2007.
22
GE18151 ENGINEERING DRAWING L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
• This course will introduce students to Engineering Drawing and build their ability to
read drawings and interpret the position and form of simple geometry, culminating into
understanding of simple technical assemblies.
UNIT 0 ENGINEERING DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS (Not for 5

Examination)
Drawing standard: BIS, Lettering, Dimensioning, Type of lines, Conventions, Geometrical
constructions: Dividing a straight line into equal parts, Bisecting a given angle, Construction of
polygon - Triangle, Square, Pentagon and Hexagon using drawing tools.
UNIT I CURVES AND PROJECTION OF POINTS AND LINES 15

Construction of Engineering Curves: Conic Sections - Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola using
Eccentricity method, Cycloid, Involute of Circle and Pentagon.
Projection: Principal Planes, Projection of Points using Four Angles of Projection, Projection of
Straight Lines - Lines parallel or inclined to one or both planes using Rotating Line Method in
First Angle of Projection.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF PLANES AND SOLIDS 15

Projection of Plane Figures - Inclined to any one Principal Plane,
Projection of Solids - Simple Solids (Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder) axis inclined to any
one Principal Plane.
UNIT III SECTION OR SOLIDS & DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 15

Section of Solids - Sectional views of simple vertical solids cut by section plane inclined to any
one Principal Plane.
Development of Surfaces - Development of lateral surfaces of truncated and frustum of simple
solids.
UNIT IV PICTORIAL PROJECTION 15

Introduction to Pictorial Projection, Isometric Projection - Principle, Isometric Planes, Isometric
Scales, Isometric Projection of simple solids and their combination.
Free Hand Drawing - Orthographic Projection - Orthographic views of simple blocks from their
Isometric view, Isometric view of simple blocks from their Orthographic views.
UNIT V PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION 10

Perspective Projection of full solids in simple positions with respect to projection planes by
visual ray and vanishing point method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course the student will be able to
• Students will construct conic sections and curves and sketch the orthographic views of
lines as per drawing standards.
• Obtain orthographic projections of plane surfaces and simple solids in various positions.
23
• Draw projections of sectioned solids and develop the lateral surfaces of simple solids.
• Draw isometric projections of simple solids and their combinations. Also perform free
hand sketching of orthographic views of given objects.
• Draw perspective projections for the given objects in different positions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt N.D, Panchal Pramod V.M and Ingle R, "Engineering Drawing", Charotar Publishing
House, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Venugopal K and Prabhu Raja V, "Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P)
Limited, 2009.
2. Shah M.B and Rana B.C, "Engineering Drawing", Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R, "Engineering Drawing" (Vol. I & II), Subhas Publications, 2010.
4. Natrajan K.V, "A Textbook of Engineering Graphics", Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai, 2006.
5. Gowri S and Jeyapoovan T, "Engineering Graphics", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
2011.
24
PC18161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
PHYSICS LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of various physical
properties of materials.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 experiments to be conducted):

1. Determination of compressibility of the liquid - Ultrasonic interferometer.
2. Determination of thickness of the given object by Air wedge method.
3. Determination of dispersive power of a prism by Spectrometer.
4. Determination of Young’s modulus of wooden scale by Non-Uniform bending.
5. Determination of wavelength, particle size and numerical aperture of fibre using Lasers.
6. Lee’s Disc – Thermal conductivity of the poor conductor.
7. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of Rigidity modulus and moment of inertia.
OUTCOMES:
• The student will be able to analyze the physical principle using the various instruments,
also relate the principle to engineering applications.
• The various experiments in the areas of optics, mechanics and thermal physics will
nurture the students in all branches of Engineering.
• The students will be able to think innovatively and also improve the creative skills that
are essential for engineering.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Spectrometer, Mercury Vapour lamp, Lee’s disc experimental setup, Travelling microscope,
Ultrasonic interferometer, Sodium vapour lamp, Diode laser, Optical fiber kit.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
• To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 experiments to be conducted):

1. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
2. Estimation of copper by EDTA.
3. Conductometric titration of a strong acid with a strong base
4. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
25
5. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer.
6. Determination of molecular weight of polymer using viscometer.
7. Determination of Alkalinity in water.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• The students will be equipped with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical
analysis of water quality related parameters.
1. Conductivity meter - 10 Nos
2. Spectrophotometer - 10 Nos
3. Ostwald Viscometer - 10 Nos
4. Potentiometer - 10 Nos
5. Electronic Balance - 2 Nos
Common Apparatus: Pipette, Burette, conical flask, iodine flask, porcelain tile, dropper (each 30
Nos.)
REFERENCES:
1. Rajendran V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Furniss B.S. Hannaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., "Vogels Textbook of
Practical Organic Chemistry", 8th Edition, LBS Singapore, 2014
26
GE18161 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all Branches) 0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
LIST OF EXPERIEMNTS
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial
buildings. Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings,
unions, reducers, elbows in household fittings.
b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections - Mixed pipe material connection - Pipe connections with
different joining components.
e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Welding:
a) Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
a) Forming & Bending:
b) Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.
c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
a) Study of centrifugal pump
b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
27
a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending.
Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in
RLC circuit.
5. Measurement and comparison of energy for resistive and LED load using single phase
energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Identification of circuit components
a) Resistor, capacitor, diode (PN & Zener), transistors.
b) Soldering practice – Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
2. Evaluating the parameters for DC power supply and AC power supply (peak-peak,
rms, average, period, frequency) using function generator and CRO.
3. Study and implementation of logic functions using NAND, NOR, and NOT gates.
4. VI Characteristics of PN Junction diode.
5. VI Characteristics of Solar photovoltaic panel.
6. Design a 5V/12V Regulated Power Supply: using FWR rectifier and

IC7805/IC7812.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Students are able to fabricate carpentry components and to lay pipe connections including
plumbing works.
• Students can use welding equipment’s to join the structures.
• Students will do wiring of basic electrical system and measurement of electrical
parameters.
• Students are able to study and implement the basic electronic components, circuits and
solar photovoltaic panel.
• Students can able to design a basic regulated power supply.
REFERENCES:
1. Jeyachandran K., Natarajan S. & Balasubramanian S., "A Primer on Engineering Practices
Laboratory", Anuradha Publications, 2007.
2. Jeyapoovan T., Saravanapandian M. & Pranitha S., "Engineering Practices Lab Manual",
28
Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd, 2006.
3. Bawa H.S., "Workshop Practice", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2007.
4. Rajendra Prasad A. and Sarma P.M.M.S., "Workshop Practice", Sree Sai Publication,
2002.
5. Kannaiah P. & Narayana K.L., "Manual on Workshop Practice", Scitech Publications,
1999.
6. Mittle V.N, Arvind Mittal, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill(India),
Second Edition,2013.
7. Sedha R.S., "A Text Book of Applied Electronics", S. Chand & Co., 2014.
S. No. Description of Equipment Qty

CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic
pipes, plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, 15 Sets.
elbows, plugs and other fittings.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools:
(a) Rotary Hammer
(b) Demolition Hammer
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer
(e) Hand Drilling Machine
(f) Jigsaw
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping
5 Sets.
hammer, wire brush, etc.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
2 Nos.
welding outfit.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator,
3. 1 each
emergency lamp
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos (b) Digital Live- 2 Nos.
29
wire detector
6. LED lamp 8 W & 16 W 2 Nos. each
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose ICs: IC7805/IC7812 1 each
6. Photovoltaic panel: 5 W/10 W 2 Nos.
7. Light Source for PV panel 1 No.
30
SEMESTER- II
HS18251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH L T P C

OBJECTIVES:
• To enable learners to define and understand technical communication and scientific writing
• To expose learners to nuances of seminar presentation, group discussion, and public
speaking
• To expose learners to writing for scientific purposes
• To expose learners to drafting correspondences for business purposes
• To expose learners to writing for documenting purposes
• To enable students to have a holistic understanding of job interviews and recruiting
process.
UNIT I 9
Listening - AV files pertaining to manufacturing processes of products, scientific documentaries;
Speaking - syllable division and word stress, intonation, sharing opinions; Reading - news articles
related to science and technology; Writing - definitions, instruction, recommendation, data
interpretation, resume; Grammar - tenses and their aspects, sentence connectors - discourse
markers, sequential words, active and passive voice, subject-verb agreement.
UNIT II 9
Listening - AV pertaining to marketing strategies, peer reading and pronunciation; Speaking -
turn taking, sharing opinions; conducting and attending a meeting, understanding the nuances of
spoken communication among internal audience and external audience; Reading - analytical
documents, descriptive documents; Writing - fliers, brochures, resume - letter of application,
checklists; Grammar - modal verbs, clauses - types and uses, conditional clauses, articles.
UNIT III 9
Listening - AV related to how to use components, scientific description, Speaking - speaking for
motivation and initiation, speaking at a seminar presentation; Reading - scientific journals,
papers; Writing - Technical descriptions - process description, purpose and function, PowerPoint,
Google forms, user manuals; Grammar - phrasal verbs, prepositions, technical and scientific
affixes.
UNIT IV 9
Listening - scientific debates, crisis management; Speaking - handling conflicts, speaking about
the loss of benefits, progress or decline of business, identifying the connotative meanings,
Reading- documented evidences of uses and functions of a product, review of a product, Writing
- memos, follow-up letters, reports - proposal, project, progress reports, sales reports, reports on
industrial visits, executive summary. Grammar - reported speech and tag questions, sentence
structure - comparative, imperative, cause and effect, infinitive of result.
UNIT V 9
Listening - AV of Group discussions, panel discussions, face to face interviews for recruitment
purposes; Speaking- speaking at group discussions, interviewing a personality, answering at the
interviews; Reading - WebPages of topnotch engineering companies, Writing - blogging, e-mails,
letter of complaint, minutes of the meeting; Grammar - one word substitution, collocations,
better word/sentence substitution (rephrasing the content/improvising ideas).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
31
Suggested Activities [task based] - case study, guest lectures as models, problem solving,
understanding team work.
Assessment:
• 3 Continuous assessments (reading, writing, grammar, and 3 assignments (1 assignment
focuses on listening 2 assignments focus on speaking, evaluation of students’ speeches and
recorded clippings)
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to
• understand the nuances of technical communication and scientific writing
• present papers and give seminars
• discuss in groups and brainstorm
• draft business correspondences and write for documenting purposes
• face job interviews with confidence
REFERENCES:
1. Department of English, Anna University. Mindscapes : English for Technologists and
Engineers. Orient Blackswan, Chennai. 2012.
2. Downes, Colm, Cambridge English for Job-hunting, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi.
2008.
3. Murphy, Raymond, Intermediate English Grammar with Answers, Cambridge University
Press 2000.
4. Thomson, A.J., "Practical English Grammar 1 & 2", Oxford, 1986.
5. Herbert A J, "The Structure of Technical English", Longman, 1965.
Websites
1. http://www.usingenglish.com
2. http://www.uefap.com3
3. https://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/
4. www.learnenglishfeelgood.com/esl-printables-worksheets.html
Software
1. Face2Face Advance – Cambridge University Press, 2014
2. English Advance Vocabulary- Cambridge University Press
3. IELTS test preparation – Cambridge University Press 2017
4. Official Guide to the TOEFL Test With CD-ROM, 4th Edition
5 . CAMBRIDGE Preparation for the TOEFL TEST- Cambridge University Press, 2017
32
MA18251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
• To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus needed for problems in all
engineering disciplines.
• To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary
differential equations that model engineering problems.
• To develop an understanding of the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to
enable the student to apply them with confidence in application areas such as heat
conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of electric current.
• To make the student appreciate the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in
which it is easier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient, divergence and curl - Directional derivative - Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields -
Vector integration - Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem
(excluding proofs) - Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopipeds.
UNIT II ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters - Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations - Simultaneous first order linear equations
with constant coefficients.
UNIT III LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12

Laplace transform - Sufficient condition for existence - Transform of elementary functions - Basic
properties - Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions - Derivatives and integrals of
transforms - Transforms of unit step function and impulse functions - Transform of periodic
functions. Inverse Laplace transforms -Statement of Convolution theorem - Initial and final value
theorems - Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients using Laplace
transformation techniques.
UNIT IV ANALYTIC FUNCTION 12

Functions of a complex variable - Analytic functions: Necessary conditions - Cauchy-Riemann
equations and sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) - Harmonic and orthogonal properties of
analytic function - Harmonic conjugate - Construction of analytic functions - Conformal mapping -
Translation, rotation and inversion (w = z+c, cz, 1/z, z2) - Bilinear transformation.
UNIT V COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Complex integration - Statement and applications of Cauchy’s integral theorem and Cauchy’s
integral formula - Taylor’s and Laurent’s series expansions - Singular points - Residues - Cauchy’s
residue theorem - Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour integrals around unit circle and
semi-circle (excluding poles on the real axis).
TOTAL (L:45 + T:15) : 60 PERIODS
33
OUTCOMES:
• Interpret the fundamentals of vector calculus and be fluent in the use of Stokes theorem and
Gauss divergence theorem.
• Express proficiency in handling higher order differential equations
• Determine the methods to solve differential equations using Laplace transforms and
Inverse Laplace transforms.
• Explain Analytic functions and Categorize transformations.
• Solve complex integrals using Cauchy integral theorem and Cauchy's residue theorem.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, " Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 8th Edition, John Wiley, 1999.
2. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Text book of Engineering Mathematics", Eighth Edition,
Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
st
3. Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 41 Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,
2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Dass, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S.Chand Private Ltd.,
2011.
2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
2012.
3. Peter V.O’Neil, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
4. Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2008.
5. Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., "Engineering Mathematics", Volume I,
Second Edition, Pearson Publishing, 2011.
34
IT18101 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to:
• Learn the organization of a digital computer.
• Learn to think logically and write algorithms or draw flow charts for problems.
• Be exposed to the syntax of C.
• Be familiar with programming in C.
• Learn to use arrays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Simple model of a Computer - Hardware - Software - Data Representation, Introduction to
Computer Networks and Internet, Problem Solving Techniques - Bottom up design and top down
design - applications, Introduction to Algorithms and Flow Chart.
UNIT II C PROGRAMMING BASICS 9

Introduction to ‘C’ programming - structure of a ‘C’ program - compilation and linking processes.
Conversion of simple algorithm to program.
Constants, Variables - Data Types - Expressions using operators in ‘C’ - Managing Input and
Output operations - Decision Making and Branching - Looping statements - solving simple
scientific and statistical problems.
UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Arrays - Initialization - Declaration - One dimensional and Two dimensional arrays - String- String
operations - Arrays of strings.
UNIT IV FUNCTIONS AND USER DEFINED DATA TYPES 9

Function - definition of function - Declaration of function - Pass by value - Pass by reference -
Recursion - Enumerators - Structures - Unions.
UNIT V POINTERS AND FILES 9

Macros - storage classes - Pointers - Definition - Initialization - Pointers arithmetic - Double
Pointers, Basic file operations - Example problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
• Apply various problem-solving techniques and represent solutions to problems in the form
of algorithms and flow charts.
• Examine given problems, design solutions and write C programs using the constructs of C
language.
• Apply the advanced constructs and string manipulation feature available in C programming
language to solve problems.
• Demonstrate the use functions, structures and unions to create modularized applications in
C language.
• Illustrate the dynamics of memory by the use of files and pointers.
35
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, "Programming in C", First Edition, Oxford University Press,
2018.
2. Byron S Gottfried, "Programming with C", Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Kernighan B.W and Ritchie D.M, "The C Programming Language", Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.
2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, "Let Us C", BPB Publications, 2011.
3. Paul J Deitel and Harvey M. Deitel, "C How to Program", Seventh Edition, Pearson
Education, 2016.
36
GE18251 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
OBJECTIVES:
• To study the nature and facts about environment.
• To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
• To implement scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to environmental
problems.
• To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and
waste management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 12

Definition, scope and importance of environment - need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem - structure and function of an ecosystem - energy flow in the ecosystem - ecological
succession - food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids - Introduction, types, characteristic
features, structure and function of the forest ecosystem, grassland ecosystem, desert ecosystem,
aquatic ecosystems, Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity - biogeographical classification of India - value of biodiversity - Biodiversity at global,
national and local levels - India as a mega-diversity nation - hot-spots of biodiversity - threats to
biodiversity - man-wildlife conflicts - endangered and endemic species of India - conservation of
biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
UNIT II NATURAL RESOURCES 10

Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people - Water resources: Use and over - utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams - benefits and problems -
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies - Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer - pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,
case studies - Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies - Land resources: Land as a resource - role of
an individual in conservation of natural resources - Equitable use of resources for sustainable
lifestyles.
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 10

Definition - causes, effects and control measures Air pollution, Water pollution, Soil pollution,
Marine pollution, Noise pollution, Thermal pollution, Nuclear hazards - solid waste management:
causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes, e-Waste, risk related to e-Waste -
role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollution case studies - disaster management:
floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion
and desertification.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7

From unsustainable to sustainable development - urban problems related to energy - water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management - resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies - role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions - Principles of green chemistry, climate
change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case
studies - wasteland reclamation - consumerism and waste products - Environment protection act -
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act - Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act -
37
Wildlife protection act - Forest conservation act - central and state pollution control boards -
Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations - population explosion - family welfare programme -
environment and human health - human rights - value education - HIV / AIDS, Swine flu, Dengue
fever - women and child welfare - role of information technology in environment and human
health management - case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
• Describe the importance of ecosystems, biodiversity and its protection.
• Implement the knowledge which requires optimum use of various natural resources for the
conservation of natural resources.
• Classify the different types of pollution, their effects and control measures. Also apply the
knowledge gained for disaster management.
• Describe the sustainable development, social issues, role of NGO’s and various laws
available in the country for environmental protection.
• Recognize the importance of women and child welfare, prevention of HIV /AIDS and
usage of technology for environmental management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, "Environmental Science and Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2012.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, "Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science", 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, "Environmental law", Prentice Hall of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
2012.
2. Erach Bharucha, "Textbook of Environmental Studies", Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, "Environmental Studies - From Crisis to Cure", Oxford University Press,
2011.
4. Tyler Miller. G and Scott E. Spoolman, "Environmental Science", Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2013.
38
ME18201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concept of equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies.
• To understand the concept of first and second moment of area.
• To understand the concept of various types of frictions.
• To understand the principle of work energy method, Newton’s law and impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT I BASICS AND STATICS OF PARTICLES 9

Introduction - Units and Dimensions - Laws of Mechanics - Principle of transmissibility -
Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces - Vectorial representation of forces - Vector operations
of forces - additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product - Coplanar Forces - rectangular
components - Equilibrium of a particle - Lami’s theorem - Forces in space - Equilibrium of a
particle in space - Equivalent systems of forces.
UNIT II STATICS OF RIGID BODIES AND ANALYSIS OF 9

STRUCTURES
STATICS OF RIGID BODIES: External, Internal forces - moment of a force - varignon‘s
theorem - moment of a couple - resolution of a force into a force and a couple - reduction of a
system of forces - reactions at supports and connections - equilibrium of a two and three force
bodies - case studies.
ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES: Simple trusses - Method of joints, method of sections - joints
under special loading conditions - space trusses - analysis of frames.
UNIT III CENTROID, CENTRE OF GRAVITY AND MOMENT OF INERTIA 9

Centroids of areas, composite areas, Theorems of Pappus and Guldinus- Parallel axis theorem and
perpendicular axis theorem - determination of moment of inertia of plane figures, polar moment of
inertia-radius of gyration - mass moment of inertia of simple solids.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9

KINEMATICS: Introduction-plane, rectilinear and rotary motion-time dependent motion -
rectangular coordinates - projectile motion.
KINETICS: Equation of motion - rectilinear and rotary motion - Newton‘s II law - D‘Alembert‘s
principle - Energy - potential energy - kinetic energy - conservation of energy - work done by a
force - work energy method.
IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM: Concept of conservation of momentum - Impulse-Momentum
principle - Impact - Direct central impact, oblique central impact, impact of a moving train on the
spring board.
UNIT V FRICTION 9
FRICTION: Laws of dry friction - angles of friction-coefficient of static and kinetic friction -
wedges - surface contact friction - belt friction - journal bearings - axle friction - thrust bearings -
disc friction - Point contact friction - wheel friction - rolling resistance - case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
39
OUTCOMES:
• Students will understand and analyze the forces distributed in static structural members
• Students will evaluate centroid, Area moment of Inertia and Mass moment of Inertia of
cross section of any structural member.
• Students will correlate the engineering problems dealing with force, displacement, velocity
and acceleration equations
• Students will evaluate the problems in friction and rigid body dynamics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R, "Vector Mechanics for Engineers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics", Eighth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, "Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics",
3rd Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhavikatti S.S and Rajashekarappa, K.G, "Engineering Mechanics", New Age International
(P) Limited Publishers, 2005.
2. Hibbeller R.C and Ashok Gupta, "Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics", 11th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
3. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao G., "Engineering Mechanics - Statics and
Dynamics", 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
4. Meriam J.L and Kraige L.G, "Engineering Mechanics - Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics Volume
2", Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,1993.
5. Vela Murali, "Engineering Mechanics", Oxford University Press, 2010.
40
PH18253 MATERIAL SCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To review physics and chemistry in the context of materials science.
• Give an introduction to the relation between structure and properties.
• Give an introduction to advanced engineering materials in the context of a composition,
properties and applications.
UNIT I THERMAL & MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Introduction - coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal stresses. Applications-bimetallic strip,
thermal insulation, thermal shock resistance, tempered glass, cryogenic materials.
Ferro and ferri magnetic materials - properties. Heisenberg and domain theory of ferromagnetism.
Hysteresis. Curie-Weiss law. Hard and soft magnetic materials and their applications,
antiferromagnetic materials - Ferrites and its applications.
UNIT II CONDUCTING & SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 10

Conductors - classical free electron theory of metals - Electrical and thermal conductivity -
Wiedemann - Franz law - Lorentz number - Draw backs of classical theory - Quantum theory -
Fermi distribution function - Effect of temperature on Fermi Function - Density of energy states -
carrier concentration in metals.
Superconductivity - properties - Type I and Type II superconductors - BCS theory of
superconductivity (Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors - Applications of superconductors.
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES 8

Elemental and compound semiconductors. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors - properties.
Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors. Carrier concentration in n-type and p-type
semiconductors. Material preparation - Czochralski’s technique and zone refining technique. Hall
effect - Hall coefficient in extrinsic semiconductors, experimental determination of Hall
coefficient. Application of Hall effect. Semiconductor devices - LDR, LED, Photodiode, Solar
Cells and LCD.
UNIT IV DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 8

Introduction to dielectric materials - Dielectric constant - Polarization of dielectric materials -
Types of Polarization (Polarizability) - Equation of internal fields in solid ( One- Dimensional)
(Derivation) - Claussius - Mosotti Relation for elemental dielectric materials - Dielectric
Breakdown - Frequency dependence of dielectric constant, Dielectric Losses - Important
applications of dielectric material.
UNIT V ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS 10

Shape memory alloys (SMA) - Characteristics, properties of NiTi alloy, advantages, disadvantages
& applications. Nanomaterials - Preparation - pulsed laser deposition - chemical vapour deposition
- Applications - Nonlinear Optical (NLO) materials - Applications - Birefringence - optical Kerr
effect - Classification of Biomaterials and its applications. Metallic glasses - preparation,
properties, applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
41
OUTCOMES:
• Students will understand the thermal and magnetic properties of materials
• Students will gain the ability to distinguish conducting, semiconducting & super conducting
materials.
• Students will get the exposure of the dielectric properties and material and its applications
materials in various fields.
• Students will analyze the requirements of advanced materials for different applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam. M, "Materials Science", Anuradha Publications, 2015.
2. Rajendran. V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Gaur. R.K and Gupta. S.L, "Engineering Physics", Dhanpat Publications, 2015.
2. Avadhnaulu. M.N and Kshirsagar, "A Textbook of Engineering Physics", S. Chand & Co.,
2006.
3. Kittlel. C, "Introduction to Solid State Physics", 7th Edition, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2004.
4. Azaroff. L.V and Brophy. J.J, "Electronic Processes In Materials", McGraw Hill., 1963.
5. James F Shackelford and Madanapalli K Muralidhara, "Introduction to Materials Science for
Engineers", Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
42
IT18111 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
(Common to all Branches Except MR)
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to
• Be exposed to the syntax of C.
• Be familiar with programming in C.
• Learn to use arrays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.
.
LIST OF EXERCISES
1. Usage of Basic Linux commands

2. C Programming using Simple statements and expressions
3. Scientific problem solving using decision making and looping
4. Simple programming for one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
5. Solving problems using Strings
6. C Programming using Pointers
7. C Programming using user defined functions (Pass by value and Pass by reference)
8. C Programming using Recursion
9. C Programming using structures and union
10. C Programming using enumerated data types
11. C Programming using macros and storage classes
12. C Programming using Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
• Demonstrate the shell commands of Linux OS.
• Apply problem solving techniques using Basic 'C' constructs.
• Demonstrate various control structures and advanced constructs in C language.
• Demonstrate the use of functions, structures, unions and pointers in developing modularized
applications.
• Experiment data handling and data processing using files in ‘C’ language.
REFERENCES:
1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, "Programming in C", First Edition, Oxford University Press,
2018.
2. Byron S Gottfried, "Programming with C", Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2010.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. No. Description of Equipment Qty

HARDWARE:
1. Computer 30
SOFTWARE:
2. Open Source Linux OS 30
3. C compiler 30
43
ME18211 MACHINE DRAWING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the concept of 2D drafting using CAD packages.
• To improve communications through documentation and to create a database for
manufacturing.
• To introduce students the basics and standards of drawing related to machines and
components.
I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING

Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting hardware - Overview of application software - 2D
drafting commands like Layers, Block, Insert (Auto CAD) for simple shapes - Dimensioning.
II CONVENTIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
BIS codes for Engineering Drawing - Abbreviations - Conventional representation of standard
components - Systems of dimensioning and dimensioning of common components - surface
finish, symbols and representing surface finish on drawing - sectioning conventions -
Representation of welded joints, riveted joints and screw threads.
III GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING, FITS AND TOLERANCES
Description of tolerances and grades - types of fits and their description - hole basis system-
selection of fits from standard tables - fits for different applications - examples - geometrical
tolerances- surface finish conventions.
IV PREPARATION OF ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
Cotter joint, knuckle joint, flange coupling, universal coupling, foot step bearing, plummer
block, connecting rod ends, cross heads, screw jack, lathe tailstock, stop valves, non-return
valve.
Note: Plotting of drawings must be made for each exercise and attached to the records written by
students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• The students will apply the CAD software for drafting and modelling of machine components.
• The students will apply the concept of various tolerances and fits used for component design.
• The students will sketch the assembly, orthographic and sectional views of various machine
components.
REFERENCES:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., "Machine Drawing, Subhas Publishers", Bangalore, 2013.
2. Bhatt.N.D, "Machine Drawing", Chorotar Publishing House, 2011.
3. Sham Tickoo, "AutoCAD 2017: A Problem-Solving Approach, Basic and Intermediate", 23rd
Edition, 2017.
4. James D. Bethune Boston University, "Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD 2002", Pearson
Education, 2005.
5. Alan Kalameja, "AutoCAD 2008: A tutor for Engineering Graphics", Auto Desk Press, 2007.
44
6. https://thesourcecad.com/autocad-tutorials/
S.No. Description of Equipment Qty

HARDWARE:
1. Computer Server 1
2. Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with atleast 1 30
GB main memory) networked to the server
3. A3 size plotter 1
4. Laser Printer 1
SOFTWARE:
5. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling 30 licenses
6. Licensed operating system Adequate
45
SEMESTER - III
MA18351 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce Fourier series analysis this is central to many applications in engineering apart from
its uses in solving boundary value problems.
• To understand the basic concepts of the Fourier transform techniques and its application in
Engineering.
• To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential
equations that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for
discrete time systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation – Linear homogeneous partial
differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients
9+3
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series –Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL 9+3

EQUATIONS
Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Solution of one dimensional wave
equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of two
dimensional equation of heat conduction (excluding insulated edges).
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3

Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and cosine
transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity
UNIT V TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3

Z- transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z - transform (using partial fraction, long division
method and residue technique) –Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations –
Solution of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL: (L45 + T:15): 60PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Express proficiency in handling higher order Partial differential equations
• Acquire the skill in examining a signal in another domain rather in the original domain by
handling Full and Half Range Fourier Series.
• Develop skills in classification, formulation, solution, and interpretation of PDE models.
• Develops the skill of conversion between time domain to frequency domain using the
46
concept of Fourier Transforms
• Apply the systematic method for finding the impulse response of LTI systems described by
difference equations: partial fraction expansion.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Wiley India, 2011.
2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi,
2012.
3. Narayanan.S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah. G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students" Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd.1998.
REFERENCES:
1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd, 2007.
2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4th Edition, Pearson Education,
2011.
3. Ray Wylie. C and Barrett.L.C, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt Ltd, Sixth Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning Indiapvt. Ltd.
7th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Veerarajan. T., “Transforms and Partial Differential Equation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012
47
ME 18301 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To familiarize the students to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to
perform thermal analysis on their behavior and performance.
(Use of Standard and approved Steam Table, Mollier Chart, Compressibility Chart)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW 12

Basic concepts -concept of continuum, comparison of microscopic and macroscopic approach.
Path and point functions. Intensive and extensive properties, total and specific quantities. System
and their types. Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, path and process. Quasi-static, reversible
and irreversible processes. Heat and work transfer, definition and comparison, sign convention.
Displacement work and other modes of work, P-V diagram. Zeroth law of thermodynamics–
concept of temperature and thermal equilibrium–relationship between temperature scales –new
temperature scales. First law of thermodynamics–application to non-flow and steady systems–
unsteady flow processes (Descriptive only).
UNIT II SECOND LAW AND AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS 12
Heat reservoirs -source and sink. Heat Engine, Refrigerator, Heat pump. Statements of second
law and its corollaries. Carnot and reversed Carnot cycles – Performance. Clausius inequality.
Concept of entropy, T-s diagram, Tds Equations Entropy change for ideal gases-different
processes, principle of increase in entropy. Applications of Second Law. High and low grade
energy. Available and unavailable energy. Exergy and Irreversibility (Descriptive Only). First
law and second law Efficiency
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE 12
Formation of steam and its thermodynamic properties, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. p-v-T
surface. Use of Steam Table and Mollier Chart. Determination of dryness fraction. Application
of First and Second law for pure substances. Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle
improvement methods-Reheat and Regenerative cycles.
UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 12
Properties of Ideal gas -Ideal and real gas comparison-Equations of state for ideal and real gases-
Reduced properties-Compressibility factor-Principle of Corresponding states-Simple
Calculations using Generalised Compressibility Chart. Maxwell relations, Tds Equations,
Difference and ratio of heat capacities, Energy equation, Joule-Thomson Coefficient, Clausius
Clapeyron equation, Phase Change Processes.
UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND PSYCHROMETRY 12
Mole and Mass fraction, Dalton's and Amagat's Law. Properties of gas mixture–Molar mass, gas
constant, density, change in internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and Gibbs function.
Psychrometric properties, Psychrometric charts. Property calculations of air vapour mixtures by
using chart and expressions. Psychrometric process –adiabatic saturation, sensible heating and
cooling, humidification, dehumidification, evaporative cooling and adiabatic mixing. Simple
Applications
OUTCOMES :
1. Students are able to analyze various Energy Transferring / transforming equipment using
First law of thermodynamics
2. Students are able to analyze various Energy Transferring / transforming equipment using
48
Second law of thermodynamics.
3. Students are able to analyze the performance of steam power plant cycle with the help of
steam table and charts.
4. Students are able to obtain different thermodynamic relations and equations for ideal and
real gases
5. Students will be able to analyze the various Psychrometric process and its applications
and also able to analyze the properties of Gas mixtures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag P.K “Engineering Thermodynamics” 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2013
2. Natarajan E., "Engineering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Applications", Anuragam
Publications, 2012.
3. Rajput R.K., “Thermal Engineering”, Lakshmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017
REFERENCES :
1. Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A.Boles “Thermodynamics an engineering approach”, 8th
Edition Tata McGraw hill Publications. 2014.
2. Holman J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Edition, McGraw – Hill 1995.
3. Rathakrishnan E “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics” 2nd Edition, Prentice –Hall

of India Pvt.Ltd, 2006
4. Chattopadhyay.P “Engineering Thermodynamics” Oxford University Press 2010.
5. Arora C.P “Thermodynamics” Tata McGraw – Hill, New Delhi 2003
6. Gordon J Van Wylen and Richard E Sonntag, “Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics”

Wiley Eastern, 1987
7. Venkatesh A. “Basic Engineering Thermodynamics” Universities Press (India) Limited 2007
8. Kau-Fui Vincent Wong, “Thermodynamics for Engineers” CRC Press 2010 India Reprint
9. Prasanna Kumar, “Engineering Thermodynamics” Pearson Education, 2013
49
ME 18302 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the fundamentals of various forming and Joining process
• To select a suitable manufacturing process for a given application
• Identify the defects in any manufacturing process
• To justify the need for High energy rate and special forming process
• To understand the processing method available for thermoplastics and thermosetting
plastics
UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 10

Introduction, Patterns – Materials, Types and Pattern allowances, Cores – Core Prints, Core
making and Types of cores, Moulding sand – Properties, types, Moulding Machines – squeeze
type, Jolt type and sand slinger, Melting Practices – Cupola and Induction Furnaces, Mould –
Expendable and Permanent Mould, Green sand Mould preparation, Special casting Processes –
Investment casting, Die casting – Hot chamber and Cold Chamber, Slush Casting, Centrifugal
Casting – True, Semi and Centrifuging, Continuous Casting, Shell Moulding, Ceramic Mould
Casting, CO2 Process, Stir Casting Process– Defects in casting
UNIT II JOINING PROCESSES 10

Fusion Welding Processes – Types of Gas Welding – Flame Characteristics , Oxy Fuel Gas
Welding, Types of Gas welding Technique, Arc Welding – Arc welding Equipment’s, Fillers and
Flux Materials, Electrodes – Coated electrode designation, Consumable Electrode – Shielded
Metal Arc Welding, Submerged Arc Welding, Gas Metal Arc Welding, Flux Cored Arc
Welding, Electro slag welding, Electro gas welding, Non Consumable Electrode – Gas Tungsten
Arc Welding, Atomic Hydrogen Welding, Plasma Arc Welding, Electron Beam Welding, Laser
Beam Welding, Solid State welding – Ultrasonic Welding, Friction Welding – Friction Stir
Welding, Resistance welding – Types, Welding defects, Soldering and Brazing
UNIT III BULK DEFORMATION PROCESSES 9

Metal Forming Classification, Hot working, Cold Working and Warm Working of metals,
Recrystallization Temperature.
Forging – Outline of Forging and related operations (Edging, Heading, Fullering, Drawing out,
Upsetting, Drawing down, Swaging, Blocking, Coining, Trimming), Various Forging Processes
such as Open and Closed die forging, Roll Forging, Iso thermal Forging and Orbital Forging,
Defects in Forging
Extrusion Process – Types of Extrusion Process- Direct and Indirect Extrusion, Hydrostatic
Extrusion, Impact Extrusion, Side extrusion, Extrusion defects
Rolling Processes – Terminology – Blooms, Billet, Slab, Plate, sheet, Foil, Types of rolling
mills, Roll Pass design, Shape rolling operations, Thread Rolling, Ring Rolling, Gear Rolling,
Roll piercing process, Rolling defects
Principles of rod, wire and tube drawing- Seamless tubes and Tube drawing methods
UNIT IV SHEET METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9

Definitions of Various Press Operations – Blanking, Punching, Shaving, Perforating, Lancing,
Slitting, Trimming, Bending, Drawing, squeezing, Press working Terminology, Types of dies for
Sheet metal operations, Press Tonnage calculation, Sheet Metal Forming operations – Bending
50
and Drawing- Elastic recovery or spring back effect, Stretch forming, Rubber pad forming,
Hydroforming, Metal Spinning – Types, High Energy Rate Forming Process – Explosive
Forming, Magnetic Pulse Forming, Electro Hydraulic Forming, Superplastic Forming,
UNIT V PROCESSING OF PLASTICS AND POWDER METALLURGY 7

Types of plastics – Types of Moulding – Injection Moulding, Blow Moulding, Compression
Moulding, Transfer Moulding, Rotational Moulding, Extrusion, Thermoforming, Calendaring
Powder Metallurgy – Production of metal Powders, Compaction – Sintering and Finishing,

Advantages and disadvantages of powder metallurgy.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Select a suitable casting process for a given engineering component
2. Given a material, the students will Apply a suitable joining process
3. Given a part diagram & its application, students will justify a suitable bulk deformation
process
4. Students will identify the necessary operations to be performed on a sheet metal and will
select a suitable process for a given application
5. Students will justify a suitable process for thermoplastics, thermosetting plastics and for
cutting tools
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.I: Manufacturing
Processes., Media Promoters & Publishers Pvt Ltd, 15th edition, 2012.
2. Serope Kalpakjian & Steven R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”,
Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd, 7th edition, 2018
3. Dr. P.C. Sharma, “A Textbook of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes), S.
Chand & Company Ltd, 8th edition, 2014
REFERENCES :
1. Mikell P. Groover, “Principles of Modern Manufacturing”, SI version, Wiley & Sons Pvt
Ltd, Global Edition, 2016
2. R.K. Rajput, “A text book of Manufacturing Technology (Manufacturing Processes)”,
Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd, 2016
3. Rao. P.N, “ Manufacturing Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd, Volume
1, 5th edition, 2018
4. Serope Kalpakjian &Stevan R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Processes for Engineering
Materials”, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd, 6th edition, 2018
E- Resources
1. http://www.ipme.ru/e-journals/RAMS/no_15418/04_15418_kawasaki.pdf
2. https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/6f56/4a28d39f1365f337be04922424472dcf3413.pdf
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107144/
51
ME 18303 MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION AND METALLURGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, heat treatment, testing and applications of
metals and non-metallic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for various
engineering applications.
UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 7
Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, Substitutional and Interstitial –Phase Diagrams-Unary
and Binary Phase diagrams of solid materials- Hume-Rothery rule, Gibbs phase rule. Invariant
reactions-eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic and peritectoid reactions. Iron – carbon equilibrium
diagram-micro constituents and invariant reactions.
UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 11
Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallization and spheroidizing – Normalizing,
Hardening and Tempering of steels. Quenching -different quenching medium and their
characteristics. Isothermal Transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T.
diagram, CCR, Hardenability, Jominy end Quench test - Austempering, Martempering. Case
hardening - Carburizing, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding, Vacuum and Plasma hardening.
Selective hardening – Flame and Induction hardening. Sintering using powder metallurgy.
UNIT III FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9
Classification of Steel & Cast Iron - Low carbon, medium carbon & High carbon steels. Grey,
White, Malleable, Spheroidal cast irons – Alloy cast irons. Effect of alloying elements on steel- α
and β stabilizers– Stainless and Tool steels – HSLA, Maraging steels.
Copper and its alloys – Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and its alloys, Al-Cu –
precipitation strengthening treatment – Bearing alloys-Al, Cu and White metal bearing alloys,
Magnesiumalloys, Nickel based super alloys and Titanium alloys. An introduction to Nano
materials
UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 7
Polymers – types of polymer, Commodity and Engineering polymers. Polymerization and its
types. Properties and applications of various Thermosetting and Thermoplastics-PP, PS, PVC,
PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI, PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE –Urea and Phenol formaldehydes.
Engineering Ceramics – Properties and applications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –
Composites- Classifications-Fiber and particulate reinforced composites - FRP - Applications of
Composites.
UNIT V MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION 11
Elastic & Plastic deformation, Young’s modulus, Stress-Strain diagram of Steel and Aluminium.
Mechanisms of plastic deformation-Slip and Twinning. Types of fracture -Ductile and Brittle.
Testing of materials under Tension, Compression, Torsion and Shear loads. Hardness tests -
Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell. Impact test-lzod and Charpy. Fatigue and Creep - Failure
mechanisms, Fatigue and Creep testing of steels.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students can contrast the impact of carbon concentration on the formation of micro
constituents in the Iron-Carbon system, as well as acquire the knowledge on microstructure
and properties of different types of steels and cast irons.
2. Students will have the ability to recognize how the non-equilibrium phases are formed in
52
steels and distinguish them using the Time-Temperature-Transformation diagram.
3. Students can select and justify the bulk heat treatment and surface treatment techniques of
steels for various engineering applications.
4. Students will have the ability to identify the suitable plastics, ceramics and composites for
different engineering applications based on their properties.
5. Students can distinguish brittle and ductile fractures and evaluate the mechanical properties
of both ferrous and non-ferrous alloys through different mechanical testing as per ASTM
standards.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raghavan.V., Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 5th edition, 2007
2. Srinivasan. R., Engineering Materials and Metallurgy, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2010
REFERENCES :
1. Agarwal, Science of Engineering Materials, Tata McGraw-Hill, 8th edition, 2012.
2. Avner, S. H., Introduction to physical metallurgy, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2013.
3. Bolton, W., Engineering materials technology, 3rd edition, 1998.
4. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski, Engineering Materials: properties and
selection, Prentice-Hall of India, 9th edition, 2010
5. William D.Callister, Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, 10th edition,
2017.
E - RESOURCES
1. NPTEL course https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113107078/.
53
ME 18304 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To develop the relationship between the loads applied to a non-rigid body and the internal
stresses and deformations induced in the body.
• To familiarize the student in calculating shear force, bending moment, deflection and
slopes in various types of beams for different loading conditions.
• To solve practical problems related to springs and shafts.
UNIT I STRESS AND STRAIN 9

Tension, Compression, Shearing Stresses and Strains - Stress-Strain relationship, Hooke’s law,
Poisson’s ratio – Elastic constants and their relations- Volumetric Strains, Thermal stresses,
composite bars
UNIT II MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO FLEXURAL LOADS 9
Shear force and bending moment. Relation between load, shear force and bending moment.
Construction of Shear force diagrams and Bending moment diagrams for different types of static
loading on cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams.
Theory of simple bending, bending stresses, section modulus, bending stress and shear stress
distribution in beams.
UNIT III TRANSVERSE DEFLECTIONOF BEAMS 9
Governing differential equation– Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of
slopes and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy method.
UNIT IV TORSION OF SHAFTS AND SPRINGS 9
Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollow shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends-Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs subjected to tension loan only, carriage springs.
UNIT V BI-AXIAL STRESS SYSTEM 9
Biaxial state of stress – Stress at a point – stresses on inclined planes – Principal stresses and
Principal strains and Mohr’s circle of stress, Theories of failure
Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure - circumferential and longitudinal
stresses and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal
pressure –Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem
TOTAL : L45 +T15 = 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will predict the behavior of the materials for different loading and support
conditions.
• Students will select suitable cross sections for the beams under different loading
conditions.
• Students will identify the methodology to find the deflections occurred in beams under
different loading conditions.
• Students will select suitable dimensional parameters for the shafts under torsional loads
54
and springs based on calculated stresses, deflection under different conditions.
• Students will determine the suitable dimensions for pressure vessels Given the loading
conditions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "A Textbook of Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 6th
edition, 2018
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017
3. Bedi D S, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishing House,2019
4. Subramanian R , Strength of Materials, Oxford University Press, 2016
REFERENCES :
1. Egor. P. Popov, "Engineering Mechanics of Solids", Pearson, 2010.

2. Ferdinand P. Beer, Russell Johnson, and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",
McGraw Hill Education, 7th edition, 2014.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, 10th Edition, 2016
4. Rattan S S, “Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 3rd Edition, 2017
5. Ramamrutham S and Narayan R, "Strength of Materials", Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New
Delhi, 2008.
6. Rajput R K, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications,2018
7. Punmia Jain and Jain, Mechanics of Materials, Laxmi Publications,2017.
E- Resources
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107146
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106141
55
EE18352 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To obtain an overview of different dc and ac motors and their characteristics.
• To study the different methods of starting, braking and speed control of DC, Induction
motors.
• To study the open loop and closed loop control of electrical drives
• To understand the operation of special electrical machines
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic Elements – Types of drives – Factors influencing the choice of electrical drives –
Mechanical characteristics – Speed-Torque characteristics of various loads - Duty classes – Safety
and Maintenance.
UNIT II DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 9

DC motors: principle, classification, characteristics, merits & demerits, applications –
Three phase and single phase Induction motors: principle, classification, characteristics, merits &
demerits, applications – Starting and braking of dc and ac motors.
UNIT III SPEED CONTROL OF DC & AC DRIVES 9

Speed control of DC motors – Armature and field control using controlled rectifiers and DC
choppers –– Speed, direction and position control with PWM using H-bridge.
Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/F control, slip power recovery
scheme – Control using inverters and AC voltage regulators.
UNIT IV CLOSED LOOP CONTROL OF DC & AC DRIVES 9

Open and closed loop control - Modeling of mechanical, electrical & fluid power systems -
Transfer function – Basics of microprocessor and microcontrollers – PID controllers – Closed loop
control of DC and AC Drives
UNIT V SPECIAL MACHINES & APPLICATIONS 9

Principle, classification, construction and characteristics of Stepper motor, DC and AC Servo
motor, BLDC motor, Switched reluctance motor &Piezo electric actuator – Driver circuits for
speed and position control of stepper motor – Drive applications in Robotics, Industrial assembly
lines and CNC machines.
TOTAL: (L: 45+ T:0): 45PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To be able to
• Operate and describe the characteristics of dc and ac motors.
• Start, brake and control the speed of dc and ac motors.
• Understand the operation of converters, choppers, inverters and ac voltage controllers.
• Outline the closed loop control schematics for dc, ac drives.
• Use dc, ac drives and special machines for the given application.
56
TEXT BOOKS:
Gopal K.Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2001
1.
2. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, IV edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010.
3. Vedam Subramaniam, “Electric Drives - Concepts and applications”, II edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Hughes E, “Electrical and Electronic technology”, 11th edition, Pearson, 2012.
2. Partab, H., “Art & Science of utilization of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai& Sons, 2017.
3. Philip Kiameh, “Electrical Equipment Handbook: Troubleshooting &Maintenance” McGraw
hill, 2003.
4. Pillai. S.K “A first course on Electric drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1998.
5. Singh. M.D.,K.B. Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, II edition. Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
57
EE18361 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES :
• To learn the operation, starting and control of dc, ac and special machines by actual
experimentation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load test on DC Shunt & DC Series motor
2. Starting and Speed control of DC shunt motor (Armature, Field control)
3. Load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor
4. Starting and Speed control of three phase Induction Motor
5. Load test on single phase Induction Motor.
6. DC motor speed control with PWM using H-bridge
7. Characteristics of dc and ac servo motors
8. Speed and position control using stepper motor
9. Closed loop control with PID regulators
10. Study of BLDC and SRM drives
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
To be able to
• Understand the characteristics of dc and ac motors
• Start and control the speed of dc and ac motors with power electronic converters
• Characterize and control dc, ac servo motors
• Characterize and control stepper motors
• Control using PID regulators.
REFERENCES :
1. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, IV edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
2. Pillai.S.K “A first course on Electric drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1998
3. Vedam Subramaniam, "Electric Drives (Concepts and Applications", Tata McGraw-Hill,
2011.
58

1. DC Shunt motor 2
2. DC Series motor 1
3. DC shunt motor-DC Shunt Generator set 1
4. DC Shunt motor-DC Series Generator set 1
5. Single phase Induction motor set 1
6. DC motor with PWM using H-Bridge circuit set-up 1
7. DC and AC servo motor set-up 1
8. PID controller set up for controlling position and speed 1
(along with any one motor)
9 SRM drive unit 1
10. BLDC unit 1
11 Stepper motor set-up for speed and position control 1
59
ME18311 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES
• To impart the practical knowledge in casting and Joining Process
• To impart the basic machining skills in lathe and to equip with the practical knowledge
required in the core industries.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
CASTING
Study of various types of patterns, pattern materials, foundry tools
1. Preparation of green sand mould for single piece pattern
2. Preparation of green sand mould for split patterns
3. Melting of non ferrous alloys and making a casting (Demonstration)
Welding
Study of arc welding and gas welding equipment’s, types of electrodes
1. Fabrication of simple structural shapes using Gas Metal Arc Welding
2. Joining of plates using Metal Inert Gas Welding / Gas Metal Arc Welding
3. Demonstration of Tungsten Arc Welding, Cold Metal Transfer Welding and Friction Stir
Welding
LATHE
Study of lathe, various mechanisms, work holding devices, tool holding devices and various
Machining operations
1. Plain, Turning and Taper Turning
2. External & Internal Thread cutting & Knurling
3. Eccentric Turning
4. Estimation of machining time for the above turning processes
5. Pin and bush assembly
6. Dismantling and assembly of headstock and tail stock of a lathe.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of this course,
1. The students can able to identify and perform the operations for a given product diagram
for a lathe.
2. The students can able to make a green sand mould using different patterns.
3. The students can able to select the suitable welding parameters to make a welded
component using Arc and MIG welding.
60
1. Centre Lathes 7 Nos.
2. Arc Welding machine 5 nos
3. Metal Inert Gas Welding 1 no
REFERENCES :
2. Dr. P.C. Sharma, “A Textbook of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes), S.

Chand & Company Ltd, 8th edition, 2014
61
ME 18312 MATERIAL TESTING AND METALLURGY
L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• To supplement the theoretical knowledge gained in Mechanics of Solids and Material
Characterization and Metallurgy with practical testing for determining the strength of
materials under externally applied loads. This would enable the student to have a clear
understanding of the design for strength and stiffness.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild steel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminium rods
3. Torsion test on mild steel rod
4. Impact test on metal specimen (Charpy & Izod)
5. Hardness test on metals – Vickers Micro-hardness, Brinell and Rockwell Hardness
Number
6. Deflection test on beams (Simply supported and Cantilever)
7. Compression test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge
9. Comparison of Mechanical properties of steel – using impact & hardness tests
i. Unhardened specimen
ii. Quenched Specimen and
iii. Quenched and tempered specimen
10. Microscopic Examination of
i. Hardened samples and
ii. Hardened and tempered samples
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Students will determine the various mechanical properties like hardness, strength (yield,
ultimate, fracture), impact using Rockwell & Brinell hardness tester, universal testing
machine and impact testing machine respectively.
• Students will evaluate Young’s modulus of steel & aluminum using simply supported and
cantilever method
• Students will evaluate stiffness and spring index of alloy spring steel using compression
test
• Students will analyse the microstructure of various heat treated steel, copper alloy and
aluminum alloy using optical microscope
• Students will analyse the medium carbon steel hardenability using Jominy end quench
testing
REFERENCES :
1. Strength of materials laboratory manual, Anna University, Chennai - 600 025.
2. IS1786-2008, specification for cold worked steel high strength deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement, 2008.
62

HARDWARE
1. Universal Tensile Testing machine with double shear 1
attachment (40 Ton Capacity)
2. Torsion Testing Machine (60 Nm Capacity) 1
3. Impact Testing Machine (300 Nm Capacity) 1
4. Brinell Hardness Testing Machine 1
5. Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine 1
6. Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads 1
(2500 N)
7. Muffle Furnace (8000 C) 1
8. Vickers Micro-hardness Tester 1
9 Deflection (Beam) testing setup – Simply supported & 1
Cantilever
10. Metallurgical Microscopes 2
11 Metallurgical specimen polishing machine 1
12 Rosette strain gauge setup 1
13 Jomni End Quench Test setup 1
63
SEMESTER - IV
MA18451 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few numerical methods and
give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in
Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE 9

PROBLEMS
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations – Newton Raphson method- Solution of linear
system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan method – Gauss Seidel
iterative method - Matrix Inversion by Gauss Jordan method - Eigen values of a matrix by Power
method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9

Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange's interpolation – Inverse interpolation using
Lagrange's method - Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Interpolation with equal intervals
- Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae.
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 9

Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using
Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule - Two point and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae –
Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY 9

DIFFERENTIALEQUATIONS
Single Step methods - Taylor’s series method - Modified Euler’s method – Fourth order Runge-
Kutta method for solving first order equations, second order equations and simultaneous first order
equations- Multi step methods - Milne’s and Adams- Bash forth predictor corrector methods for
solving first order equations.
UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PARTIAL 9

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Finite difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations
on rectangular domain – One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and implicit (Crank
Nicholson) methods – One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Apply numerical technique to solve algebraic and trancendental equations.
• Apply the knowledge and skills of numerical methods to do interpolation and
approximation.
• Develops the skill to evaluate differentiation and integration numerically.
• Acquire the skill to solve ordinary differential equation numerically.
• Acquire the skill to solve partial differential equation numerically.
64
TEXT BOOKS:
Grewal. B.S., and Grewal. J.S., Numerical methods in Engineering and Science, Khanna
1.
Publishers, 9th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Iyengar. S.R.K., andJain. R.K, Numerical Methods, New Age International Publishers, New
Delhi,2012.
3. William Embleton OBE and Leslie Jackson, Reed’s Mathematics for Engineers, Adlard
Coles Nautical, London, 2011.(for Marine Engineers)
REFERENCES:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Wiley, India, 2007.
2. Chapra. S.C., and Canale.R.P., Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw Hill,5th
Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Brian Bradie. A friendly introduction to Numerical analysis, Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2007.
4. SankaraRao. K., Numerical methods for Scientists and Engineers, Prentice Hall of India
Private, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Gerald. C. F., and Wheatley. P. O., Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, Asia,
6th Edition, New Delhi, 2006.
6. Venkataraman. M.K. Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering, National Publishers,
1995.
7. Kandasamy. K., Thilagavathy. K., and Gunavathi. K., Numerical Methods, S. Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
65
ME18401 THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in thermodynamics
into analysis of cyclic processes
• To apply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines,
Steam Turbines, Compressors and Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems
(Use of standard refrigerant property databook, Steam Tables, Mollier diagram and
Psychrometric chart permitted)
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IC ENGINES AND GAS POWER CYCLES 12
Working principles of IC engines. Classifications-Components and their functions. Valve timing
diagram and port timing diagram-actual and theoretical p-V diagram of four stroke and two
stroke engines.
Otto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton cycles, Calculation of mean effective pressure, and air standard
efficiency-Comparison of cycles.
UNIT II INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES SYSTEM AND 12

PERFORMANCE
Simple and complete Carburetor. MPFI, Diesel pump and injector system, CRDI. Battery and
Magneto Ignition System- Principles of Combustion and knocking in SI and CI Engines.
Lubrication and Cooling systems. Performance calculations -Fuel consumption, Brake power,
Indicated power, Friction power, Thermal efficiencies and Heat Balance sheet.
UNIT III STEAM NOZZLES AND TURBINES 12

Flow of steam through nozzles, shapes of nozzles, effect of friction, critical pressure ratio, super
saturated flow. Impulse and Reaction principles, compounding, velocity diagram for simple and
multi-stage turbines, speed regulations– Governors.
UNIT IV AIR COMPRESSOR 12

Classification and working principle of various types of compressors, work of compression with
and without clearance, Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency of
reciprocating compressors, Multistage air compressor and intercooling – work of multistage air
compressor. Applications of air compressor in Automobile vehicles
UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 12

Refrigeration-Vapour compression refrigeration cycle-super heat, subcooling – Performance
calculations – working principle of Vapour absorption system, Ammonia–Water, Lithium
bromide–water systems (Descriptive only). Airconditioning system - Processes, Types and
Working Principles –Concept of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF-Cooling load estimation (Descriptive
only). Refrigerants – desirable properties, refrigerants used in modern Refrigerators and Air-
conditioners.
TOTAL: (L: 45+ T:15 ): 60PERIODS
66
OUTCOMES:
1. Student are able to compare and contrast the various system & components of IC engine
and also to analyze their performance of air standard cycles
2. Student are able to understand the various system used in IC engine and also to analyze
their performance.
3. Students are able to distinguish the different types of nozzle, turbines and compressor and
to analyze their performance
4. Students are able to distinguish the different types of air compressor and to analyze their
performance
5. Students are able to analyze the performance of different air conditioning system and to
design an air conditioning system for chosen application.
TEXT BOOKS:
Kothandaraman. C.P., Domkundwar. S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in Thermal
1.
Engineering", Fifth Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,2002.
2. Rajput. R.K., "Thermal Engineering", Laxmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Arora. C.P, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning",Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1994.
2. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Ramalingam. K.K.,"Thermal Engineering", SCITECH Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
4. Rudramoorthy. R.,"Thermal Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
5. Sarkar. B.K, "Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
67
ME 18402 MACHINE TOOLS AND MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To acquire knowledge about the theory of metal cutting, mechanism of chip formation and
the cutting parameters that influence the machining processes
• Understand the types of machine tools, their specifications and operations performed.
• To choose a particular type of machine tool depending upon the surface being generated
• To teach the students about the different gear generation methods
• Get introduced to the non-traditional machining processes.
UNIT I METAL CUTTING THEORY & SIMPLE MACHINING 9

PROCESSES
Introduction to Metal Cutting, Cutting tools – Nomenclature, Materials, Tool Life, Tool Wear,
Cutting fluids & Thermal aspects, Chips: Mechanics of chip formation, Types of chips,
Orthogonal metal cutting - Single point cutting tool, Forces in Machining – Merchant’s Circle
diagram, Oblique cutting, Tool dynamometer – Types, Construction and working.
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL AND SEMI AUTOMATS 9
Lathe –Classification, Constructional features, Various Operations – Taper turning methods,
Thread cutting methods, Machining time and Power estimation. Capstan and turret lathes- Tool
layout, Work holding devices – Types and construction, Lathe specifications, Operation planning
sheet for turned components
UNIT III OTHER MACHINE TOOLS & GEAR MANUFACTURING 9
Drilling, Shaping and Milling machines – Classification, Construction and operations, Cutters &
types, Comparison of processes. Broaching Machines – Push, Pull, surface and continuous
broaching. Nomenclature of Drill tool, Milling tool, reamers and broaching tool. Operation
planning sheet.
Gear cutting: Classification, Principle and construction of Gear milling, Hobbing and Shaping
processes. Procedure for generating spur and helical gear.
UNIT IV ABRASIVE PROCESSES & CNC MACHINES 9
Finishing processes: Grinding - cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding and
internal grinding, Grinding wheel specification, Buffing, Honing & Lapping, Super Finishing,
Laser Ablation.
Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tools –Constructional details, Special features,
Turning centre, Machining centre. Introduction to Part programming – Fanuc – G & M codes,
sample programs for simple lathe and milling operations.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO NON TRADITONAL MACHINING 9
PROCESSES
Introduction, Classification, Abrasive Jet Machining, Waterjet Machining, Ultrasonic
Machining, Electrical Discharge Machining, Wire Cut EDM, Chemical Machining, Electro
Chemical machining, Electro chemical grinding, Laser Beam Machining, Electron beam
machining, Plasma Arc Machining - Working Principles, Equipment used and Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
68
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will be able to estimate the cutting force during machining, identify the type of
chips for a given material and will justify the tool angles for a given single point cutting tool
2. The students will be able to elucidate the construction details and will prepare the operation
planning sheet for a given part diagram
3. Students will choose appropriate gear manufacturing process and its associate machine tools
for gear manufacturing
4. Students can classify and choose among the finishing processes as per requirement
5. Students will be able to choose appropriate non – traditional machining processes based on
their principle and limitation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.II., Media Promoters,
2010.
2. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCES :
1. Geofrey Boothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools", CRC

Press, 2005.
2. Mikell P. Groover, “Principles of Modern Manufacturing”, SI version, Wiley & Sons Pvt
Ltd, Global Edition, 2016
3. Paul De Garmo, J.T. Black, and Ronald. A. Kohser, “Material and Processes in
Manufacturing”, Wiley Publications, 12th edition, 2017
E RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112105233/lec19.pdf
2. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~vkjain/Lecture2-Metalcutting.pdf
3. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112105127/pdf/LM-32.pdf
4. http://utopm.fsid.cvut.cz/podklady/TE2/Lectures/Lecture_no_10_Gears_Machining.pdf
5. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Non-traditional-machining.pdf
6. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/OVERVIEW_OF_NTM_PROCESSE
S.pdf
69
ME18403 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge of motion characteristics of mechanisms and machine to make the students
to develop new mechanisms.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS AND SYNTHESIS OF LINKAGES 12

Classification of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitions – Degree of freedom,
Mobility – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler‟s criterion – Grashof‟s Law – Kinematic inversions of
Four-bar chain and Slider crank chains – Limit positions – Mechanical advantage – Transmission
Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line
generators, Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.
SYNTHESIS OF LINKAGES: Number and Dimensional synthesis – Two position synthesis of
slider crank and four bar- mechanisms.
UNIT II KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 8
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method–
Velocity and acceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic
analysis of simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Acceleration
UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 8
Classification of cams and followers – Terminology and definitions – Displacement diagrams –
Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of follower
motions, Layout of plate cam profiles - Pressure angle and undercutting.
UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Law of toothed gearingand conjugate action – Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles –Spur Gear
terminology and definitions –Gear tooth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercutting.
Helical, Bevel, Worm, Rack and Pinion gears [Basics only].
Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains.
UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 8
Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –
Friction clutches– Friction in brakes- Band and Block brakes- Basics of Bearings and lubrication.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will classify the mechanisms involved in various applications.
• Students will design the linkage mechanisms for specified output motions.
• Students will compute the displacement, velocity and acceleration for any given planar
mechanisms.
• Students will calculate the kinematic parameters of cam and gear mechanisms.
• Students will evaluate the motion and the dynamical forces acting on mechanical systems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rattan S S, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishers,New Delhi, 2017.
2. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of Machines”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2011.
3. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Pvt.
70
Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
5. Thomas Bevan, Theory of Machines, 3rd edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2009.
REFERENCES :
1. Erdman AG and Sandor G N, “Mechanism Design, Analysis and Synthesis”, Vol.I, PHI
Inc., 2001.
2. Khurmi, R.S., “Theory of Machines”,14th Edition, S Chand Publications, 2015
3. Rao J S and Dukkipati, “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, Wiley- Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,
2015.
4. Cleghorn W.L. , Mechanisms of Machines, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition,2015
6. John Joseph Uicker, Gordon Pennock, Joselph E.Shigley, “Theory of Machines and
Mechanisms”, Fifth Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
7. Robert L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata Mc GrawHill, 2017.
E- Resources
2. https://www.mekanizmalar.com/
3. http://dynref.engr.illinois.edu/aml.html
STANDARDS
1. IS 2458 : 2001, Vocabulary of Gear Terms –Definitions related to Geometry.
2. IS 3756 : 2002, Method of Gear Correction –Addendum modification for External

cylindrical gears with parallel axes.
3. IS 5267 : 2002 Vocabulary of Gear Terms –Definitions Related to Worm Gear

Geometry.
4. IS 12328 : Part 1: 1988 Bevel Gear Systems Part –1 Straight Bevel Gears.
5. IS 12328 : 1988 Bevel Systems Part –2 Spiral Bevel Gears.
71
ME18404 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• This course will give an appreciation of the fundamental principles, design and operation of
hydraulic and pneumatic machines, components and systems and their application in recent
automation revolution
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINCIPLES AND FUNDAMENTALS 7

Introduction, Advantages and Applications of Fluid power system. Types of fluid power systems
-Basics of Hydraulics and Pneumatics. Hydraulic fluids- types and properties of hydraulic fluids.
Properties of air– Perfect Gas Laws, Pascal’s Law, Darcy’s equation, Valves and fittings. Losses
in pipes and fittings-K factor. Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS 11
Sources of Hydraulic power- Pumping Theory – Pump Classification- Construction, Working,
Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance and Selection criterion of Linear& Rotary pumps.
Hydraulic Actuators - Cylinders & Motors - Types and construction. Control Components -
Directional control, Flow control and Pressure control valves- Types, Construction, Operation
and Applications. Fluid Power ANSI Symbol.
UNIT III DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9
Accessories - Pressure Switches, Electrical switches, Limit switches, Relays – Applications.
Types of Accumulators and its Applications.
Design of Hydraulic circuits- Reciprocation, Speed control- meter-in & meter-out circuits,
Sequence, Synchronization, Regenerative, Pump Unloading-Double pump circuits. Pressure
Intensifier, Air-over oil system, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits and
Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEM AND COPONENTS 7
Compressors- types and working principle. Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air control
Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems. Introduction to Fluidics,
Pneumatic logic circuits.
UNIT V DESIGN OF INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC 11
CIRCUITS
Design of circuits using the components of hydraulic system for Drilling, Planning, Shaping,
Punching, Pressing operations. Sequential circuit design for simple application using cascade
method, Electro pneumatic circuits.
Selection of Hydraulic and Pneumatic components, Installation, fault finding and maintenance of
hydraulic and pneumatic components. Microprocessor and PLC- Applications in Hydraulic and
Pneumatics, Low cost Automation
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will have the ability to illustrate the principles, basic laws, applications,
advantages and disadvantages of fluid power systems.
2. Students will be able to illustrate the construction, working and selection of different
72
hydraulic components.
3. Students will have the ability to design the basic hydraulic circuits for different industrial
applications.
4. Students will be able to distinguish the construction, working and selection of different
pneumatic components & fluidic elements and apply them for designing the basic
industrial pneumatic circuits.
5. Students will describe the concepts of Electrohydraulic, microprocessor, PLC, and able to
design the hydraulic & pneumatic circuits for the automation of different industrial
processes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education, 7th edition, 2009.
2. James L. Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2002.
REFERENCES :
1. Dudelyt, A Pease and John J.Pippenger, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice Hall, 1987.
2. Majumdar, S.R., Oil Hydraulics Systems-Principles and Maintenance, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., Pneumatic Systems-Principles and Maintenance, Tata McGraw-Hill,

2007.
4. Micheal J, Pinches and Ashby, J.G., Power Hydraulics, Prentice Hall, 1989.
5. Shanmuga Sundaram, K.,Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls, S. Chand limited, 2006.
6. Srinivasan. R., Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.
E – RESOURCES
1. NPTEL Course - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105046/
73
ME18405 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• This course imparts the basic knowledge of fluids in static, kinematic and dynamic
equilibrium.
• They will also gain the knowledge of the applicability of physical laws in addressing
problems in hydraulics.
• This course imparts the importance of various types of flow in pumps and turbines.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 12

Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mass density, specific weight, specific volume,
specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility, vapor pressure, surface tension and capillarity.
Pressure measurement devices - U-tube manometers, pressure gauges. Flow characteristics –
concept of control volume - applications of continuity equation, energy equation and
momentum equation
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 12
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli-
Boundary layer concepts – types of boundary layer thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation –
friction factor- Moody diagram- commercial pipes- minor losses – Flow through pipes in series
and parallel.
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12

Need for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similitude – types of
similitude - Dimensionless parameters- application of dimensionless parameters – Model
analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 12
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various efficiencies–
velocity components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps–
working principle - work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump-
working principle – Rotary pumps –classifications.
UNIT V TURBINES 12
Classification of turbines – heads and efficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed
flow turbines. Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work
done by water on the runner – draft tube. Specific speed - unit quantities – performance curves
for turbines – governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Students will understand the basic knowledge of properties and characteristics of fluids.
2. Students will apply the physical laws in solving the problems in hydraulics.
3. Students will perform dimensional and model analysis.
4. Students will evaluate the performance of roto dynamic pumps and reciprocating pumps.
5. Students will determine the performance of turbines and select the type of turbine for an
74
application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, 5th edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2008
2. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House,
New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Fox W.R. and McDonald A.T., Introduction to Fluid Mechanics John-Wiley and Sons,
Singapore, 1995.
2. Jain A. K. "Fluid Mechanics", Khanna Publishers, 2010
3. Roberson J.A and Crowe C.T., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Jaico Books Mumbai,
2000.
4. Streeter, V.L., and Wylie, E.B., “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2003.
75
ME18411 FLUID MECHANICS & MACHINERY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
1. The students can able to have hands on experience in flow measurements using different
devices
2. The students can able to calculate the losses in pipes
3. The students can able to study the performance characteristic of pumps and turbines
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter
2 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter
3 Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter
4 Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipe
5 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/
submersible pump
6 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump
7 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump
8 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel
9 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine
10 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. The students will be able to use the flow measurement equipment.
2. The students will analyse the performance of various pumps.
3. The students will analyse the performance of various turbines.
REFERENCES :
1. Kumar K. L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi,
2004
2. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House, New
Delhi, 2004.
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”,
2011.
4. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co., 2010.

1 Orifice meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submersible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton wheel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
76
ME18412 METAL MACHINING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES
• To Study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in special
purpose machines and its applications in real life manufacture of components in the
industry.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Contour milling using vertical milling machine
2. Spur gear cutting in milling machine
3. Helical Gear Cutting in milling machine
4. Gear generation in hobbing machine
5. Gear generation in gear shaping machine
6. Cylindrical grinding
7. Tool angle grinding with tool and Cutter Grinder
8. Measurement of cutting forces in Turning Process
9. Round to square using shaper
10. Round to hexagon using milling
11. Drilling and tapping in a radial drilling machine (Practice with and without drill jig)
Demonstration only (Not for exam)
1. External keyway cutting using planner
2. Centreless grinding
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Student will select an appropriate machine tool to manufacture gears
• Student will select an appropriate grinding machine based on the plane surface of the
component.
• Given a tool signature, students will manufacture the single point cutting tool.
1. Capstan Lathes 1 No.
2. Horizontal Milling Machine 2 Nos
3. Vertical Milling Machine 1 No.
4. Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.
5. Cylindrical Grinding Machine 2 Nos.
6. Lathe Tool Dynamometer 2 Nos.
7. Gear Hobbing Machine 1 No.
77
8. Gear Shaping machine 1 No.
9. 14 Centreless grinding machine 1 No.
10. Tool and cutter grinder 1 No.
11. Planner 1 No.
REFERENCES :
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.II., Media Promoters.
2. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology - Metal Cutting and Machine Tools", Tata
McGrawHill,New Delhi, 2003.
3. Richerd R Kibbe, John E. Neely, Roland O. Merges and Warren J.White
"Machine Tool Practices", Prentice Hall of India, 1998.
4. Geofrey Boothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools", Mc Graw
Hill, 1984.
78
ME18413 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY –I L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES :
1. To study the valve timing and performance of IC Engines
2. To Study the characteristics of fuels/Lubricants used in IC Engines
3. To study the Performance of steam generator and turbine
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams.
2. Performance Test on 4 –stroke Petrol Engine/ Diesel Engine.
3. Heat Balance Test on 4–stroke Diesel Engine.
4. Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine.
5. Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine.
6. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels / Viscosity of lubricating oil.
7. Performance, combustion and emission Test on 4 –stroke Diesel Engine.
STEAM LAB
8. Study on Steam Generators and Turbines.
9. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.
10. Steam Calorimeter to find quality of steam.
11. Performance Test on Steam Turbine.
12. Performance Test on Steam Condenser.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• The student will compare the port and valve timing diagram and can demonstrate the
characteristics of fuels/Lubricants used in IC Engines.
• The student can analyze the performance characteristics of petrol and diesel engine,
steam generator and steam turbines.
• Students will examine the combustion and emission characteristics of diesel engine and
steam generator.
REFERENCES :
1. Rajput. R.K., "Thermal Engineering", Laxmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017.

2. Kothandaraman. C.P., Domkundwar. S, Domkundwar. A.V., "A Course In Thermal
Engineering", Fifth Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2002.
3. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", Third Edition, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, 2007.
4. Rudramoorthy, R, "Thermal Engineering", Tata Mcgraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
79

1. I.C Engine –2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1
2. Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1

3. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading 1
4. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading 1
5. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading 1
6. Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1
7. Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1

8. Data Acquisition system with any one of the above engines 1
9 Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1
80
SEMESTER V
ME 18501 METROLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To define accuracy, precision, calibration, sensitivity, repeatability and relevant terms in
metrology.
• To provide knowledge on various metrological equipment available to measure the
dimensions of the components and process parameters.
• To provide knowledge on quality and control process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO METROLOGY & LINEAR 9
MEASUREMENTS
Introduction to Metrology – Basics - Need – Precision and Accuracy, Errors in Measurements,
Comparators – Mechanical, Electrical & Optical. Interchangeability - limits, fits and
tolerances, Limit gauges, Taylor's principle of gauge design. Calibration, Sensitivity,
readability & repeatability. Linear measurement - Vernier calipers – Vernier height gauge-
Vernier depth gauge - Micrometers – Digital calipers - Slip gauges.
UNIT II ANGULAR AND FORM MEASUREMENTS 9
Angular Measurement - Angular measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor, Spirit
levels, Sine bar – Sine center – Sine table – Angle Dekkor - Autocollimator.
Form Measurement - Measurement of surface finish – Surf Tester. Screw thread measurement
– Minor diameter & Effective diameter – Two wire method. Gear measurement - Gear
terminology - Errors in gears – Pitch & Tooth thickness measurement - Parkinson's gear tester.
UNIT III ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9
Interferometry – Types of Interferometers – Michelson interferometer – NPL flatness
interferometer. Laser metrology - Basic concept of lasers - Advantages of Laser – Laser
Interferometers – Types – DC and AC lasers interferometer – Applications. Coordinate
Measuring Machines - Types of construction – Probes. CNC CMM, Machine vision system –
Image acquisition & Image processing.
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF PROCESS PARAMETERS 9
Measurement of Force – Load cells – Hydraulic & Pneumatic load cells – LVDT. Basics of
Torque & Power measurement. Flow measurement – Differential pressure flow meter,
Magnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meter. Temperature measurement - Thermocouples –
Radiation pyrometer – Infrared temperature sensor.
UNIT V QUALITY CONTROL 9
Quality – Definitions - Meaning of quality of product & services - Quality of conformance &
Quality of performance. ISO 9000 Series & other standards, necessity of ISO certification.
Statistical Quality Control – Meaning and importance of SQC, Control charts for variables – X
& R charts, Acceptance Sampling.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will have the ability to select the suitable mechanical measuring instruments
for linear and angular measurements and calibrate them to improve the accuracy.
2. Students can acquire the knowledge on form measurements with effective
81
communication for engineering applications.
3. Students can acquire the knowledge on advanced measuring devices and their
applications for dimensional and form measurements.
4. Students will have the ability to select the suitable instruments to measure the different
process parameters like pressure, temperature and force.
5. Students will have the ability to apply the different quality principles and sampling
techniques to ensure the quality of the products.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain R.K “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 21st edition, 2005.
2. Gupta. I.C., “Engineering Metrology”, 7th edition, Dhanpatrai Publication, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Charles Reginaid shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, 5th edition, Cengage Learning
EMEA,1990
2. Beckwith, Maragoni & Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education, 6th
edition, 2007.
3. Mahajan M, “Textbook of Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai & Co (p) Ltd, 2010.
4. Juran U. M and Gryna, “ Quality Planning and analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Logothetis N, “Managing for Total Quality”, Prentice-Hall, Delhi
WEB RESOURCES :
1. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Metrology.pdf
82
ME 18502 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart knowledge on the fundamental force-motion relationship in components
subjected to external forces and analysis of standard mechanisms.

• To determine the undesirable effects of imbalances resulting from prescribed motions in
mechanism.
• To inculcate the concepts of vibration and damping principles
• To identify the undesirable effect of vibrations and its controlling procedures.
• To understand the principles in mechanisms used for speed control and stability control
UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 12
Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic
Analysis in Slider Crank Mechanism – Turning moment diagrams –Fluctuation of Energy and
Speed, Weight of Flywheel required.
UNIT II BALANCING OF MASSES 12
Dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating masses under single and several planes –
Balancing of reciprocating masses - Primary and secondary forces and couples– Balancing of
linkages.
UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 12
Basic features of vibratory systems – Degrees of freedom – single degree of freedom – Free
vibration – Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped
vibration– Critical speeds of shafts – Dunkerley Method- Torsional vibration of shaft –
Torsional vibration – Two rotor Torsional systems.
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION AND MESUREMENT 12
Response of one-degree freedom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –
Disturbance caused by unbalance – Support motion –transmissibility – Vibration Isolation-
General considerations in vibration measurement-vibration pickups.
UNIT V CONTROL MECHANISMS 12
Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controlled and spring controlled
Centrifugal governors – Characteristics – Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic forces– Gyroscopic effects
in Automobiles, Ships and Airplanes.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will evaluate the dynamic forces acting on the elements of any given
mechanism
• Students will analyse and solve the unbalancing forces for reciprocating and rotating
machineries.
• Students will apply the vibration and damping principles to calculate the natural
frequency of free vibrating bodies.
• Students will apply the concept of vibration transmissibility and isolation for
mechanical members.
83
• Students will analyse the motions involved in automotives using governor and
gyroscopic concepts.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao,S.S, “Mechanical Vibrations,” Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2011.
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of Machines: Kinematics and Dynamics”, Pearson Education,
Third edition, 2011.
4. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
Oxford University Press, Fifth Edition,2017.
REFERENCES :
1. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", East-West Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
2. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 2009
3. Khurmi, R.S., “Theory of Machines”, S Chand Publications, 2005.
4. Rao J.S. and Dukkipati R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1992.
5. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2009.
WEB RESOURCES :
2. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2364/dynamics-of-machines/
3. https://cosmolearning.org/courses/dynamics-of-machines/
4. https://www.edx.org/course/machine-dynamics-with-matlab-3/
84
ME18503 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• This course will impart the knowledge on various types of stress and selection of
materials
• This course will make acquainted design principles of shaft and fits and tolerances.
• This course will familiarize the design principles of springs under dynamic and static
conditions.
• This course will enable to check strength of fasteners –Rivet, bolts and welding.
• This course will facilitate to select and examine the rolling and sliding contact bearings
(Use of PSG Design Data Book is Permitted)
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN PROCESS AND STRESSES IN 14
MACHINE ELEMENTS
Design Process- Factors influencing machine design-Selection of materials based on mechanical
properties-types of Stress- Calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations-
eccentric loading-Factor of Safety-Stress concentration factor - Theories of failures- Design for
variable loading -Cyclic stresses-Notch sensitivity - Fatigue stress concentration factor-
Introduction to fracture mechanics
UNIT II SHAFTS, KEYS, COUPLINGS AND FITS AND TOLERANCE 12
Preferred Numbers- Standardization- Design of shafts under static and fatigue loadings, Keys –
type of keys -design of keys- Design of Rigid coupling and Flexible coupling -Fits and
Tolerances- Types of fits- Hole basis system and Shaft basis system
UNIT III SPRING DESIGN 12
Design of Close coil helical springs under varying load condition. Design of Leaf spring, Disc
Spring and Torsion spring
UNIT IV DESIGN FOR RIVETED, WELDING AND BOLTED JOINTS 12
Riveting – Types of rivet joints, Caulking and fullering, Design of riveted joints for structural
and pressure vessels. Eccentrically loaded riveted joint-Welding – Welding symbols, Design of
welded joints under eccentric loading-Geometry of thread forms-Terminology of screw threads-
Design of bolted joints.
UNIT V BEARINGS 10
Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings – Design of sliding contact bearings-Introduction to
Elasto hydrodynamic lubrication - Journal Bearings. - Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Students will calculate the stresses in simple machine elements subjected to static and fatigue
loading.
• Students will design the shafts, keys and couplings under different loading conditions for
mechanical systems.
• Students will design the welded joints, riveted joints and threaded joints subjected to direct
and eccentric loadings.
• Students will design the helical coil springs and flywheels for mechanical machineries.
• Students will select and design the bearings for the given application.
85
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Element”, TMH Publications. 3rd edition, New Delhi,
2017.
2. Sundararajamoorthy, T.V. and Shanmugam, N., “Machine Design”, Anuradha Agencies,
Chennai, 2003.
3. Shigley, J.E., Charles, R.M. and Richard, G.B., “Mechanical Engineering Design”,
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Khurmi R.S., and Gupta J.K., “Machine Design”, S Chand & Co, New Delhi, 14th Edition
2005.
2. Lingaiah K., “Machine Design Data Book”, Tata McGraw – Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Robort.L.Norton,” Machine Design”, Pearson Publisher, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2018.
4. Sharma P.C and D.K Sharma, “Machine Design”, Agrawal - Kataria and Sons
Publications. NewDelhi, 2014.
5. Spotts M.F., “Design of Machine Elements”, Pearson Education, NewDelhi, 8th Edition,
2019
WEBRESOURCES:
1. http://www.mhhe.com/bhandari/dme3e
2. https://www.machinedesign.com › basics-design › hydrodynamic-bearings
3. https://fac.ksu.edu.sa › sites › default › files › mechanical-disgin-shigley.
4. www.iitbbs.ac.in › cur › btech.
86
ME 18504 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C
(Use of standard HMT data book permitted)
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the mechanisms of heat transfer under steady and transient conditions.
• To study the heat transfer rate for laminar and turbulent flows
• To calculate radiative heat fluxes between surfaces of simple geometries
• To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic
Concepts of mass transfer.
UNIT I CONDUCTION 12
General Differential equation of Heat Conduction–Cartesian and Polar Coordinates–One
Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction ––Plane and Composite Systems –Conduction with
Internal Heat Generation –Extended Surfaces –Unsteady Heat Conduction –Lumped Analysis –
Infinite Solids –Use of Heusler’s charts.
UNIT II CONVECTION 12
Free and Forced Convection -Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Free and Forced
Convection during external flow over Plates and Cylinders, non circular cross section and
Internal flow through tubes flow, across banks of tubes, on circular cross section.
UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT 12
EXCHANGERS
Nusselt’s theory of condensation-Regimes of Pool boiling and Flow boiling. Correlations in
boiling and condensation. Heat Exchanger Types -Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient –Fouling
Factors -Analysis –LMTD method -NTU method.
UNIT IV RADIATION 12
Black Body Radiation –Gray body radiation - Shape Factor algebra –Electrical Analogy –
Radiation Shields. Radiation through gases.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 12
Basic Concepts –Diffusion Mass Transfer –Fick’s Law of Diffusion –Steady state Molecular
Diffusion –Convective Mass Transfer –Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy–
Convective Mass Transfer Correlations.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Student will illustrate the concepts of heat transfer in steady, transient and infinite solids.
2. Students will examine the heat transfer coefficients for Natural and Forced convection.
3. Students will apply the concepts of heat transfer in heat exchanger, Boiling and
condensation phenomenon.
4. Students can determine the radiation in black body, grey body and gases.
5. Students will analyze the mass transfer occurring in both diffusion and convection mode.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer",
87
John Wiley & Sons, 8th Edition, 2018.
2. Yunus A. Cengel, "Heat Transfer A Practical Approach", Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition,
2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Ghoshdastidar,P.S, "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Press , 2012

2. Holman, J.P., "Heat and Mass Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, 7th edition,2010
3. Kothandaraman, C.P., "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer", New Age
International, New Delhi, 1998.
4. Nag, P.K., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,3rd edition 2011
5. Ozisik, M.N., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill Book Company., 1994.
6. Sachdeva, R.C. Fundamentals of Engineering Heat Transfer, New Age Science Ltd.,
New Delhi; 4th edition, 2009.
7. Thirumaleshwar. M : Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, "Heat and Mass
Transfer", First Edition, Dorling Kindersley,2009.
8. Venkateshan. S.P, “Heat Transfer", Ane Books, New Delhi, 2004.

9. Yadav, R., "Heat and Mass Transfer", Central Publishing House, 1995.
WEB RESOURCES:
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101097/1121081491/112104159/103105052.
88
ME18511 DYNAMICS AND VIBRATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES :
• To get exposure into the principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.
• To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic and Vibration testing.
• To determine the natural frequencies of the equivalent systems.
• To get familiar with the various motion controlling principles and its applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of Mass moment of inertia and Radius of Gyration of Fly wheel and Axle
system
2. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Gyration of Symmetric bodies using Turn
Table apparatus
3. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration using
a) Bifilar suspension b) Trifilar Suspension
4. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration using compound
pendulum
5. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic couple effect
6. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell, and
Hartnell Governors. (Any two Governor).
7. Cams – Cam profile drawing and study of jump phenomenon
8. Verification of Torsion equilibrium using Epicyclic Gear Train
9. Balancing of rotating masses
10. Single degree of freedom Spring Mass System – Determination of natural Frequency
11. Determination of torsional natural frequency of single Rotor systems under Undamped
and Damped condition.
12. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critical speeds of shafts
13. Transverse vibration of Free-Free beam – with concentrated masses using Dunkerley’s
Principle.
14. Forced Vibration of Cantilever beam under damped and undamped conditions
15. Determination of material damping under Free Vibration condition using standard
Impulse hammer test.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
NOTE:
• From the above listed experiments, considering the aim and measuring parameter as a
guideline, twelve experiments can be framed for a semester.
• Among them 1, 5,6,7,8,9,10 are to be included compulsory.
OUTCOMES
• Students will calculate the Moment of Inertia and radius of gyration for the mechanical
members.
• Students will determine the natural frequency of free and forced vibration systems
89
• Students will analyse the motion transmission in cam and gears.
• Students will analyse the performance characteristics of governors and gyroscope
REFERENCES :
1. Laboratory Manual Prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering
90
ME 18512 METROLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION
L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• To gain the practical knowledge on linear, angular measuring instruments and Comparators.
• To study the features of Coordinate measuring machine for linear, angular and form
measurements.
• To understand the errors involved in force, temperature and torque measurements.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of measuring instruments: Vernier caliper/ Micrometer/ Dial gauge/ Vernier
height gauge/ Bevel protector.
2. Measurement of industrial components using comparators: Mechanical / Electrical /
Pneumatic comparator
3. Measurement of Angle: Profile projector/ sin bar/ sine center/ Tool maker’s microscope
4. Measurement of Bore diameter: Bore Dial gauge /Telescopic gauge
5. Straightness measurement using Autocollimator
6. Linear and angular measurement using CMM
7. Screw thread measurement using Floating Carriage Micrometer.
8. Measurement of Chordal width and Chordal addendum of spur gear using Gear Tooth
Vernier Caliper.
9. Measurement of flatness using Autocollimator/Optical interferometer
10. i) Force Measurement using Proving Ring.
ii) Torque Measurement using Torque measuring equipment.
11. Temperature measurement: Thermocouple/Thermistor /RTD
12. Form measurement of complex specimen using Coordinate Measuring Machine
13. Measurement of surface roughness using Surface Finish Measuring Equipment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. Students will have the ability to calibrate the linear and angular measuring instruments with
the help of comparators and standards.
2. Students can evaluate the different parameters of threads and gears using different form
3. Students will have the ability to apply the coordinate measuring machine to measure
different dimensions and forms of given components.
4. Students will have the ability to measure the process parameters like force, pressure &
temperature and analyze the errors in measurement.
REFERENCES :
1. Metrology and Instrumentation Laboratory Manual Prepared by Faculty of Mechanical

91
Engineering, Sri Venkateswara College of Engineering.
2. Prof.[Dr.] Dalgobind Mahto, “Metrology and Industrial Inspection Lab Manual” 2011.
92
ME 18513 Heat Transfer, Refrigeration & Air conditioning
L T P C
Laboratory
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES :
• To enable the students to apply conduction, convection and radiation heat transfer concept
to practical application.
• To study the performance of refrigeration and air conditioning system/components/cycle
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I HEAT TRANSFER LAB: 30 PERIODS
1 Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.
2 Determination of heat transfer coefficient under natural convection from a vertical
Cylinder.
3 Determination of heat transfer coefficient under forced convection from inside tube
4 Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wall.
5 Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder
6 Heat transfer from pin -fin apparatus (natural & forced convection modes
7 Determination of Stefan –Boltzmann constant
8 Determination of emissivity of a gray surface
9 Effectiveness of Parallel / counter flow heat exchanger
10 Performance test on a reciprocating air compressor
II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB 15 PERIODS
1 Determination of COP of a refrigeration system
2 Performance test on Air conditioning system
3 Performance test on a HC Refrigeration System
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. Student will build the practical knowledge on working principles of refrigeration and air
conditioning system.
2. Student will demonstrate the working principles of air compressor, heat exchanger.
3. Student will identify the practical familiarity on operation of conductive, convective and
radiation heat transfer apparatus.
REFERENCES :
1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons 2007.
2. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech Publications,
2002.
3. Ganesan, "Internal Combustion Engines", II Edition, TMH, 2002.
93
4. R. C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engineering Heat Transfer, New Age Science Ltd., New
Delhi; Year: 2009
5. Thermal Engineering Laboratory Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering,
94
SEMESTER VI
ME 18601 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• The purpose of this course is to make the students to get familiarized with various
computer aided tools that can be implemented in design and manufacturing.
• This course will provide knowledge on Geometric Modelling and Visual Realism.
• To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component
design and its manufacturing.
Product cycle- Design process- sequential and concurrent engineering- Computer aided design
– CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D
transformations- homogeneous coordinates – Line drawing -Clipping- viewing transformation
UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING 9
Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-
Techniques for surface modeling – surface patch- Coons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-
spline surfaces. Solid modeling techniques- CSG and B-rep.
UNIT III VISUAL REALISM 9
Hidden – Line-Surface-Solid Removal Algorithms – Shading – Coloring – Engineering
Animation.
UNIT IV CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) – standards for exchange
images- Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) – Data exchange standards – IGES, STEP, CALS
etc. – communication standards.
UNIT V COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING 9
Introduction to NC systems and CNC – Machine axis and Co-ordinate system- CNC machine
tools-Principle of operation CNC- Construction features including structure- Drives and CNC
controllers - Introduction of Part Programming, – Detailed Manual part programming using
FANUC on Lathe & Milling machines using G codes and M codes- Introduction of CAM
package.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will be able to differentiate between conventional design & CAD; Perform 2D
& 3D transformations. Also, can write algorithms for lines.
• Students will be able to understand and select different curves and surfaces for
applications.
• Students will be able to understand hidden line, surface, solid removal algorithms and
various techniques of colouring and shading.
• Students will be able to understand different graphic and data exchange standards.
• Students will be able to understand the principles of operations of CNC machines and
develop CNC manual part programming using G-codes and M-codes for a given
component.
95
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Agoston and Max K, “Computer Graphics & Geometric Modeling”, Springer-Verlag
London Limited, 2005.
2. Gerald Farin, “Curves and Surfaces for CAGD - A Practical Guide”, Morgan-
Kaufmann, 2002.
3. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.2009 2.
Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics with open GL”, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, Inc., 2014.
4. Mikell P. Groover, Emory W. Zimmer, CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design &
Manufacturing, Pearson Education, 1st edition, 2003
5. Rao. P.N “CAD/CAM Principles & Applications”, TMH Publications, 3rd edition,
2010
REFERENCES:
1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and

Manufacturing management” Second Edition, Pearson Education, 1999.
2. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice"
Pearson Education - 2003.
3. Jayanta Sarkar “Computer Aided Design: A Conceptual Approach” CRC Press, 2014.
4. Shah J J and Mantyla M, “Parametric and Feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 1995.
5. William M Neumann and Robert F. Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”,
McGraw Hill Book Co. Singapore, 1989.
WEB RESOURCES :
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102102/
96
ME 18602 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of flexible elements.
• To understand and familiarize the standard procedure available for Design of cylindrical
gears.
• Insight the standard procedure available for Design of bevel and worm gear drives.
• To impart the knowledge on gears in the design of gear box.
• To enhance the practicing in design of clutches and brakes.
(Use of PSG Design Data Book permitted)
UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS 12
Design of Flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and pulleys – Selection of hoisting wire
ropes and pulleys – Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets.
UNIT II SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 12
Speed ratios and number of teeth -Force analysis -Tooth stresses - Dynamic effects –
Fatigue strength - Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical
gears based on strength and wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and
transverse plane- Equivalent number of teeth-forces for helical gears
UNIT III BEVEL AND WORM GEARS 12
Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth.
Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demerits
Terminology. Thermal capacity, materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of
the worm gear pair.
UNIT IV GEAR BOXES 12
Geometric progression - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout -Design of sliding
mesh gear box - Design of multi speed gear box for machine tool applications - Constant mesh
gear box Speed reducer unit. – Variable speed gear box for automotive applications.
UNIT V CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 12
Design of plate clutches –axial clutches - cone clutches - internal expanding rim clutches,
Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes - external shoe brakes – Internal expanding
shoe brake.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will apply procedures to design the belt and chain drives.
• The students will apply the design procedure for spur and helical gear drives using the
manufacturer’s catalogue.
• The students will analyze the bevel and worm gear drive design by adopting the
manufacturer’s catalogue
• The students will design the gear box by adopting the design procedures
• The students will design the clutches and brakes using the laws of friction.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 4th Edition,
2016.
97
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 10th Edition, 2015
REFERENCES :
1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-
Hill Book Co.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010.
2. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach", Tata McGrawHill Book Co,
2nd Edition, 2015.
3. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid, Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,
Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co., 3rd Edition, 2014.
4. Jindal, U.C., “Machine Design-Design of Transmission System", Dorling Kindersley,
2010.
5. Merhyle F. Spotts, Terry E. Shoup and Hornberger, Lee. E, “Design of Machine
Elements”, Printice Hall, 8th Edition, 2003.
6. Prabhu, T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2000.
7. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, Wiley,
2013.
8. Sundararajamoorthy, T.V and Shanmugam.N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha
Publications, Chennai, 2003.
WEB RESOURCES:
98
ME 18603 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.
• To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow.
• To gain some basic Knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.
(Use of Standard Gas Tables permitted)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 12
Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves
and Mach cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable
ducts – Nozzle and Diffusers, Design of inlets nozzles and Diffusers
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 12
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow), Slope of Rayleigh line,
and Friction (Fanno flow) Slope of Fanno line– Flows through constant area ducts in a
isothermal flow-variation of flow properties.
UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 12
Governing equations –Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks –
Prandtl –Meyer relations, Rankine-Hugoniot equations, Strength of the shock–Applications.
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 12
Theory of jet propulsion –Thrust equation –Thrust power and propulsive efficiency –
Operating principle, cycle analysis and performance characteristics of ram jet, turbojet,
turbofan and turbo prop engines, Aircraft matching.
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 12
Types of rocket engines – Propellants feeding systems – Theory of rocket propulsion –
Performance study – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Applications – space flights.-
Rocket equations – Escape and Orbital velocity.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will interpret the one-dimensional compressible flow through variable area
duct.
2. Students can apply governing equations to compressible flow through constant area
duct with friction and heat transfer.
3. Students will identify the suitable solution for the compressible flow in normal and
oblique shock.
4. Student will analyze the propulsion methods, concepts of aircraft propulsion system
and performance of the jet.
5. Student will explain the concepts of gas dynamics in space propulsion system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compressible flow” 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Yahya, S.M. "Fundamentals of Compressible Flow", New Age International (P)
Limited, New Delhi, 6th edition, 2016.
99
REFERENCES :
1. Babu. V., "Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics", ANE Books India, 2008.

2. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamutto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group
Ltd.,1980.
3. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,1999.
4. Hill. P. and C. Peterson, "Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion" , Addison –
Wesley Publishing company, 1992.
5. Somasundaram. PR.S.L., "Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions", New Age International
Publishers, 1996.
6. Sutton. G.P., "Rocket Propulsion Elements", John wiley,New York,1986,.
7. Shapiro. A.H.,"Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow", John
Wiley, New York, 1953.
8. Zucrow. N.J., "Aircraft and Missile Propulsion", Vol.1 & II, John Wiley, 1975.
9. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines”, John Wiley, New York,
1970.
WEB RESOURCES :
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103021/101106044/112106166
100
ME 18611 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To apply the knowledge acquired from core courses to get practical experience on design
and fabrication processes.
GUIDELINES
1. The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor.
2. A particular domain / field shall be selected by the students in consultation with their
supervisor.
3. The students shall be encouraged to attend a design thinking workshop / opportunity

identification session / problem statement writing.
4. Then, the device / system / component(s) to be fabricated, may be decided in consultation

with the supervisor and if possible with an industry.
5. The specifications device / system / component(s) to be arrived by following / doing

design calculations.
6. The appropriate manufacturing process(es) to be identified.
7. The students shall prepare time schedule to complete the project.
The progress of the fabrication / development of the device / system / component(s) shall
8. be reviewed at intermediate stages by means of conducting reviews for which internal
assessment mark will be awarded.
At the end of the semester examination, the project work shall be evaluated based on oral
9. presentation, demonstration of the working model and the project report jointly by
external and internal examiners.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. The students will apply the design principle for developing a mechanical device /system /
component.
2. Will apply the manufacturing techniques to fabricate the working model.
101
ME 18612 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING
L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modelling software systems.
• To study the features of CNC Machine Tool.
• To expose students to modern control system (Fanuc)
• To know the application of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical
Machining centre, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I 3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING 32 hours
1. Introduction of 3D Modelling software
Creation of 3D assembly model of following machine elements using 3D Modelling
software
2. Extrusion
3. Revolving
4. Blend
5. Sweep Blend
6. Flange Coupling
7. Plummer Block
8. Introduction of CNC Milling code generation
9. Kinematics mechanism in Assembly
II MANUAL PART PROGRAMMING 28 Hours
11. Part Programming - CNC Machining Centre
a) Linear Cutting.
b) Circular cutting.
c) Cutter Radius Compensation.
d) Canned Cycle Operations.
12. Part Programming - CNC Turning Centre
a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning.
b) Thread Cutting.
c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle.
d) Drilling and Tapping Cycle
13. Computer Aided Part Programming

a) CL Data and Post process generation using CAM packages.
b) Application of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
NOTE:
1. From the above listed experiments, considering the modelling and part programming as a
guideline, twelve experiments can be framed for a semester
102
OUTCOMES
1. Interpret the given 2D drawing and create a 3D part using 3D modeling software.
2. Create a 3D assembly in the assembly module using the 3D parts created in the part
modeling module.
3. Generate 2D detail drawing for the given parts & assembly models.
4. Develop CNC part program for the given component using CAM software and simulate the
tool path.
REFERENCES :
1. Creo Parametric 4.0 Tutorial by Roger Toogood, SDC Publications, 2017.
2. CAD / CAM Laboratory Manual Prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Sri
Venkateswara College of Engineering
103
SEMESTER VII
ME 18701 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the students, understand the mathematical and physical principles underlying the
Finite Element Method (FEM) as applied to solid mechanics, heat transfer and fluid flow
problems.
• To teach the students, the characteristics of various elements and selection of suitable
elements for the problems being solved.
• To make the students derive finite element equations for simple and complex elements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 12

General description of Finite Element Method - General procedure of FEM - Applications of
FEM – FEA softwares. General field problems, Discrete and continuous models, Variational
formulation in finite elements – Ritz method - Weighted residual methods – Galerkin – sub
domain – Method of least squares and collocation method - numerical problems
UNIT II APPLICATIONS IN STRUCTURES 12
One dimensional elasticity – Castigliano’s first theorem – Principle of minimum potential energy
- Linear spring - Elastic bar with constant and varying cross sections using linear and quadratic
elements – Truss structures and Beams.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS IN PLANE ELASTICITY 12
Introduction to plane elasticity theory – Plane stress, Plane strain and Axisymmetric problems –
Finite Element formulations of plane elasticity problems using CST and four noded quadrilateral
elements only
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS IN HEAT TRANSFER AND VIBRATION 12
Finite Element formulation of One-dimensional and Two-dimensional steady state heat
conduction problems with convection - Simple elements only
Longitudinal vibration frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth Order Beam Equation –Transverse
deflections and Natural frequencies of beams
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC FORMULATION 12
Iso, Sub & Super parametric element, shape functions for four noded, eight noded and nine
noded rectangular elements – Numerical Integration-Gaussian quadrature -Matrix solution
techniques - Solutions Techniques to Dynamic problems - Introduction to Analysis Software.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will apply the principles involved in the finite element approach on
mechanical systems.
• The students will solve structural problems using 1D elements involving engineering
applications
• The students will apply the concept of 2D plane elasticity and analyze the stresses in
structural members.
• The students will solve thermal and vibration problems using 1D elements
104
• The students will differentiate the shape functions and stiffness matrix for Isoparametric
elements
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reddy J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, fourth Edition, McGraw-
Hill Mechanical Engineering, Reprint, 2018.
2. Seshu, P, "Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi,2007.
REFERENCES :
1. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Witt, "Concepts and
Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Fourth Edition, Wiley StudentEdition,2010.
2. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla, Ashok D. Belagundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering”, Third Edition, Reprint, Prentice Hall, 2012.
3. Zienkiewicz O.C and Taylor R. L, “The Finite Element Method: Volume 1 The Basics”,
Fifth Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford. Reprint 2011.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-092-finite-element-analysis-of-
solids-and-fluids-i-fall-2009/lecture-notes/
105
ME 18702 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To enable the students to apply the concepts of CIM and computerized tools and
techniques in various aspects of Manufacturing Viz., Computer assisted planning,
Manufacturing, layout, design, Automation, Production planning and control systems,
Robotics, Material handling systems and database management
UNIT I CIM CONCEPTS, AUTOMATION AND COMPUTER AIDED 9
PROCESS PLANNING
CIM concepts – Meaning and origin of CIM - Production systems – Automation in production
systems – Automation principles and strategies - Basic elements of an automated systems –
Advanced automation functions - Levels of automation - Process planning – Computer Aided
Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Variant and Generative approaches of CAPP.
Integration of CAD/CAPP/CAM/CNC.
UNIT II CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Families – Parts Classification and coding – Simple Problems in
Opitz Part Coding system – Production Flow Analysis – Cellular Manufacturing – Composite
part concept – Machine cell design and layout – Quantitative analysis in Cellular
Manufacturing – Rank Order Clustering Method - Arranging Machines in a GT cell – Hollier
Method – Simple Problems.
UNIT III FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND 9
AUTOMATED GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS)
Types of Flexibility - FMS – FMC/FMS Components – FMS Application, Quantitative
analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS) – AGVS
Application – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 9
Robot Anatomy and Related Attributes – Classification of Robots- Robot Control systems –
End Effectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability - Industrial Robot
Applications – Intelligent robots.
UNIT V OPEN SYSTEM AND DATABASE FOR CIM 9
Open systems-open system inter connection - manufacturing automations protocol and
technical office protocol (MAP /TOP). Development of databases -database terminology-
architecture of database systems-data modelling and data associations -relational data bases -
database operators - advantages of data base and relational database.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Students will be able to understand the concepts of CIM, automation and CAPP and
select appropriate automation technology for a given manufacturing scenario.
• Students will be able to derive GT code for the given drawing using Opitz coding
system and do quantitative analysis for the performance of cellular manufacturing.
• Student will be able to apply the concept of FMS and its applications and be able to
solve simple quantitative analysis problems in FMS. Also understand AGVS, its
applications and vehicle guidance management and safety.
• Students will be able to select an appropriate type of robot, end effector and sensor for
a given application.
• Students will be able to understand OSI, MAP and TOP. Also, will be able to
understand various data modelling and architecture of database.
106
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell. P. Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 4th edition, 2016.
2. R Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 4th edition, New
Age International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES :
1. Xun Xu, “Integrating Advanced Computer-Aided Design, Manufacturing, and

Numerical Control”. Information Science Reference, 2009.
2. Kant Vajpayee S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall
India, 2009.
3. David D.Bedworth, Mark R.Hendersan, Phillip M.Wolfe “Computer Integrated Design
and Manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2004.
4. Roger Hannam “Computer Integrated Manufacturing: From concepts to realisation”,
Addison –Wesley, 2007.
WEB RESOURCES :
107
ME 18703 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the knowledge about elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics systems
which are very much essential to understand the emerging field of automation
• To study the role of microcontrollers in automation industry
• To describe the mechatronics design solutions for various industrial applications
• To study the role of PLC and SCADA used in automation.
UNIT I SENSORS, TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS 10

Static and dynamic Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance sensors –
Strain gauges – Load cell – Eddy current sensor – Hall effect sensor – Temperature sensors –
Light sensors - Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle –
Advantages and Disadvantages.
UNIT II MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER 14
Introduction – Architecture of 8085 – Pin Configuration – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085 - Programming – Concepts of 8051 microcontroller – Block diagram.
Concepts of 8255 PPI – Block diagram.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 14
Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output processing – Programming – Mnemonics –
Boolean algebra - Timers, counters and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC
Applications of PLC
UNIT IV MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 12
Mechatronics, key elements of mechatronic systems, Stages in design, traditional and
mechatronic design approaches, Data acquisition systems, overview of I/O process, virtual
instrumentation software. Condition monitoring, adaptive control and SCADA systems. Possible
Design Solutions
UNIT V MECHATRONICS APPLICATIONS 10
Mechatronic control in automated manufacturing, Artificial intelligence in Mechatronics, Fuzzy
logic applications in Mechatronics, Microsensors in Mechatronics - Case studies - pick and place
robot, engine management system, consumer mechatronic products.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will illustrate and understand the basic concepts of Mechatronics system and
its constituent systems such as measurement system, control systems and various sensors
and transducers involved in mechatronics system design.
2. The students will be able to develop the programming for microprocessor and
microcontroller which they can be implemented in mechatronic system design
3. The students will able to interface the various modules involved in mechatronics system
design
4. The students will able to write the programs to automate any manufacturing process
using PLC
5. The students will be able to design a mechatronics system for a given application using
mechatronics approach.
108
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Prentice Hall, 2019
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with
the 8085”, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.
REFERENCES :
1. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
2013.
2. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, PWS publishing
company, 2013.
3. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall of India, 2013.
larence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Press, First Indian Re-print, 2014.
4. Michael B. Histand and Davis G. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill International 4th edition, 2017.
5. Smaili.A and Mar, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2012.
WEB RESOURCES:
• https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103174/
109
ME 18711 COMPREHENSION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES :
• To recall the knowledge, acquired through various theory and laboratory courses studied
from the first semester to sixth semester.
METHOD OF EVALUATION
1. The students will be assessed 100% internally to test his / her understanding of
fundamental concepts of mechanical engineering discipline.
2. Seminar, MCQ type of tests, case study, etc. will be conducted at periodical interval by
covering all the professional core courses.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. The students will remember the concepts, learnt from the courses studied in the previous
semesters.
2. The students will comprehend the technical knowledge which will help them to enhance
their employability skill or entrepreneurial skill
110
ME 18712 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION
L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES :
• At the end of this course the students would have developed a thorough knowledge of the
Computer Aided Finite Element Analysis packages with an ability to effectively use the
tool for solving practical problems arising in engineering applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I ANALYSIS: 36 Periods
1. Force and Stress analysis using link elements in Trusses, cables etc.
2. Stress and deflection analysis in beams with different support conditions.
3. Stress analysis of flat plates and simple shells.
4. Stress analysis of axi–symmetric components.
5. Thermal stress and heat transfer analysis of plates.
6. Thermal stress analysis of cylindrical shells
7. Vibration analysis of spring-mass systems.
8. Modal analysis of Beam.
9. Harmonic, transient and spectrum analysis of simple systems.
B SIMULATION: 24 Periods
11. MATLAB basics, Dealing with matrices, Graphing-Functions of one variable and two
variables.
12. Use of Matlab to solve simple problems in vibration.
13. Mechanism Simulation using Multibody Dynamic software.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Students will analyse and simulate the structural components for various mechanical
applications using analysis software.
• Students will analyse and simulate the thermal components for various mechanical applications
using analysis software.
• Students will predict the performance of vibration systems using MATLAB analysis software.
REFERENCES :
1. ANSYS Workbench Tutorial Release 13: Kent Lawrence, SDC Publications.
2. Simulation and Analysis Laboratory Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical
Engineering, Sri Venkateswara College of Engineering.
WEB RESOURCES:
https;//sites.ualberta.ca/ ᷉ wmoussa/AnsysTutorial/
111
ME 18713 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To synergies the combination of mechanical, electronics, hydraulics, pneumatics and

sensors used in automation industry.
• To introduce the principles of machine vision system
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Realizing Basic circuits using Hydraulic and Pneumatic concepts.

2. Realizing Electro-Pneumatic circuits using electrical timers.
3. Realizing of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC).
4. Simulation of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Fluid-Sim Software.
5. Simulation of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Automation Studio Software.
6. Assembly language programming of 8085 Microprocessor.
7. Interfacing of Stepper motor and Traffic light control using 8051 Microcontroller.
8. Speed control of AC/DC and Servo motor.
9. Measurement of Displacement using Linear Variable Differential Transducers (LVDT).
10 Torque and Strain measurement using Wheatstone bridge Strain gauge.
11. Measurement of Angle using Rotary Potentiometer.
12. Measurement of temperature using temperature transducer (Thermistor / Thermocouple /
RTD)
13. Measurement of Voltage and current using Hall Effect transducer.
14. Image processing technique using Machine Vision system.
15. Programming on Pick and Place robot manipulator.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will illustrate to work on basic fluid power based automated process.
2. The students will be competent to program a pick and place robot for different
operations.
3. The students will be able to identify the various accessories, tooling’s required
for automation.
4. The students will be able to design and program for the given sequence of operation
using Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
5. The students can control a process using microprocessor/ microcontroller.
112
REFERENCES :
1. Anthony Esposito,” Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005
3. Mechatronics Lab Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering Sri
Venkateswara College of Engineering.
113
SEMESTER VIII
ME 18811 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 24 12
OBJECTIVES :
• To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and
literature Review till the successful solution of the same.
• To train the students in preparing project reports and to face reviews and viva voce
examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4works on a topic approved by the Head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member and prepare a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a
minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the
Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated
based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by an external and internal examiner
constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL : 360 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
1. On Completion of the project work, students will be in a position to summarize any

challenging practical problems and find solution by adapting proper methodology.
114
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I, IV, V ( To be chosen during ODD SEMESTER )
ME 18001 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart an insight in construction and working principle of various parts of an
automobile
• To describe the assembling and dismantling process of engine parts and transmission
system
• To study about different alternate fuels for IC Engine for the betterment of society.
• To study about different emission norms and its standards
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body,
Vehicle aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC Engine components –
functions, materials and its applications in land (Off road and On road), water and air vehicles,
variable valve timing (VVT) and its necessity
UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines (SPI, MPFI, GDI),
electronically controlled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type
and common rail direct injection system CRDI), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil
ignition system, capacitive discharge ignition system), Supercharger and Turbo chargers (WGT,
VGT), Engine emission control by three way catalytic converter system, SCR system and EGR
system
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes-manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over
drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints
Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Steering geometry and types of steering gear box - Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Types
of Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System
(ABS), electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Hybrid Vehicles - Fuel Cell – Electric Battery = Electric vehicle – feasibility study of Electric,
Hybrid and fuel cell vehicle, Alternate fuels - Emission norms (Euro and BS) and Driving cycle
Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission
Systems should be given to the students
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will classify the automobiles, their construction and working of various
auxiliary systems.
2. The students will determine the various electronics components involved in automobile
working system.
3. The students will evaluate mechanical system performance along with electronics
115
components.
4. The students will design a suitable working system based on the energy sources used in an
automobile.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,
New Delhi, 2002.
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol.1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard
Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES :
1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA,
1998.
3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, 1999.
4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockel , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The
Good heart–Will Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
5. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers,1989.
WEBREOURCES:
116
ME 18003 BIO MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basics of biomaterials and their properties
• To obtain the knowledge of various types of materials used as implants
• To design and develop materials for medical and electronic applications
• To test the compatibility of materials with their host
UNIT I BASICS OF BIO MATERIALS 7

Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials,
Comparison of properties of some common biomaterials. Effects of physiological fluid on the
properties of biomaterials. Biological responses (extra and intra-vascular system). Surface
properties of materials, physical properties of materials, mechanical properties
UNIT II METALLIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 9
Stainless steel, Co-based alloys, Ti and Ti-based alloys. Importance of stress-corrosion cracking.
Host tissue reaction with bio metal, corrosion behavior and the importance of passive films for
tissue adhesion. Hard tissue replacement implant: Orthopedic implants, Dental implants. Soft
tissue replacement implants: Percutaneous and skin implants, Vascular implants, Heart valve
implants-Tailor made composite in medium
UNIT III POLYMERIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 11
Polyolefin’s, polyamides, acrylic polymers, fluorocarbon polymers, silicon rubbers, acetyls.
Viscoelastic behavior: creep-recovery, stress-relaxation, strain rate sensitivity. Importance of
molecular structure, hydrophilic and hydrophobic surface properties, migration of additives
(processing aids), aging and environmental stress cracking. Physiochemical characteristics of
biopolymers. Biodegradable polymers for medical purposes, Biopolymers in controlled release
systems. Synthetic polymeric membranes and their biological applications. Polymers filled with
estrogenic fillers.
UNIT IV CERAMIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 9
Definition of bio ceramics. Common types of bio ceramics: Aluminum oxides, Glass ceramics,
Carbons. Bio restorable and bioactive ceramics. Importance of wear resistance and low fracture
toughness. Host tissue reactions: importance of interfacial tissue reaction. Composite implant
materials: Mechanics of improvement of properties by incorporating different elements.
Composite theory of fiber reinforcement (short and long fibers, fibers pull out). Host tissue
reactions.
UNIT V DESIGN & COMPATIBILITY 9
Design of materials for biomedical application: Cardiovascular, dental implants, orthopedic
application, skin, ophthalmologic applications, wound healing, sutures, biomedical and
biosensors. Biocompatibility & Toxicological screening of biomaterials: Definition of
biocompatibility, blood compatibility and tissue compatibility.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will be able to understand various biomaterials and their properties.
2. The students will be able to understand various metallic implant materials and their
117
properties and select a suitable material for the given application.
3. The students will be able to understand various polymeric implant materials and their
properties and select a suitable material for the given application.
4. The students will be able to understand various ceramic implant materials and their
properties.
5. The students will be able to design materials for various implants based on material
property and compatibility and choose a suitable material for the given application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Buddy D. Ratner, Allan S. Hoffman, Frederick J. Schoen and Jack E. Lemons,
“Biomaterials Science: An Introduction to Materials in Medicine”, Academic Press,
2004.
2. J.B. Park and J.D. Bronzino, “Biomaterials: Principles and Applications”, CRC Press.
2002.
REFERENCES :
1. T. M. Wright, and S. B. Goodman, “Implant Wear in Total Joint Replacement: Clinical

and Biologic Issues, Material and Design Considerations”, American Academy of
Orthopedic Surgeons, 2001.
2. L Ambrosio, “Biomedical composites”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2009.
3. K.C. Dee, D.A. Puleo and R. Bizios, “An Introduction to Tissue-Biomaterial
Interactions”, Wiley publications, 2002.
4. T.S. Hin, “Engineering Materials for Biomedical Applications”, World Scientific, 2004.
5. B. Rolando, “Integrated Biomaterials Science”, Springer, 2002
WEB RESOURCE :
118
ME18005 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS L T P C
(COMMON TO ME & AE) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• This course aims to provide the fundamental knowledge on different types of fibers and
matrix and their properties
• The course will impart knowledge on different processing methodology adopted for
polymer matrix composites.
• The course focuses on fundamental constitutive equations for different types of
composite lamina.
• To predict the strength of laminates using various failure criteria.
• To familiarize the metal, ceramic, and carbon composite materials and their processing
methods.
UNIT I FIBERS AND MATRIX MATERIALS 9
Fibers – Fabrication, Structure, properties and applications – Glass fiber, Boron fiber, carbon
fiber, organic fiber, ceramic and metallic fibers - whiskers– Fabrication of Matrix materials –
polymers, metals and ceramics and their properties – interfaces – Wettability – Types of bonding
at the interface – Tests for measuring interfacial strength - Physical and chemical properties.
UNIT II PROCESSING OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 8
Classification of Polymers – Properties of Thermo and Thermosetting Plastics – Extrusion,

Polymer matrix composites: hand layup, spray, filament winding, Pultrusion, resin transfer
moulding, autoclave moulding - bag moulding, compression moulding with Bulk Moulding
Compound and sheet Moulding Compound – thermoplastic matrix composites – film stacking,
diaphragm forming, thermoplastic tape laying, injection moulding – interfaces in PMCs -
structure, properties and application of PMCs –recycling of PMCs.- Introduction to Biopolymer
Composites – Natural fiber and Matrices – Properties and Applications
UNIT III LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS 10
Lamina Assumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint. Generalized Hooke’s Law. Reduction to

Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij),
Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generally Orthotropic Lamina –
Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stiffness. Laminate Constitutive Equations – Coupling
Interactions, Balanced Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cross Ply
Laminates.
119
UNIT IV LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 10
Introduction - Maximum Stress and Strain Criteria. Von-Misses Yield criterion for Isotropic
Materials. Generalized Hill’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hill’s Failure Criterion for
Composites. Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure
Equilibrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling
Analysis. Free Vibrations – Natural Frequencies and mode shapes
UNIT V PROCESSING OF METAL, CERAMIC AND CARBON MATRIX 8

COMPOSITES
Metallic matrices: Aluminium, titanium, magnesium, copper alloys – processing of MMCs:

liquid state, Solid state, in situ fabrication techniques – diffusion bonding – powder metallurgy
techniques interfaces in MMCs – mechanical properties – machining of MMCs – Applications.
Introduction to Nano composites
Processing of CMCs: cold pressing, sintering, reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, lanxide
process – in situ- chemical reaction techniques: chemical vapour deposition, chemical vapour
impregnation, Solgel – interfaces in CMCs – mechanical properties and applications of CMCs –
Carbon carbon Composites – applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to differentiate the fiber and matrix materials and select
appropriately for suitable applications
2. Students will apply suitable processing method for fabrication of different kinds of
composites
3. Students will calculate the Lamina Constitutive Equations to micro model the composite
materials.
4. Students will identify and analyze the performance of composite materials by applying
various failure criteria.
5. Students will be able to use the metal, ceramic, and carbon composite materials for real
time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gibson R.F. “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics”, Second edition, McGraw

Hill, 1994.
2. Hyer M.W, “Stress Analysis of Fiber- Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw Hill,
1998.
120
REFERENCES :
1. Isaac M. Daniel, Ori Isha, “Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford

University Press, 2005
2. Krishnan K Chawla, “Composite Materials: Science and Engineering”, International
Edition, Springer, 2012
3. Mallick P.K., “Fiber Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”,
CRC press, New Delhi, 2010
4. Mallick, P.K. and Newman.S., “Composite Materials Technology”, Hanser Publishers,
2003.
5. Said Jahanmir, Ramulu M. and Philp Koshy, “Machining of Ceramics and Composites”,
Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1999
6. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman, K. Chandrashekhara , Analysis and
Performance of Fiber Composites, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,2006.
7. Robert M. Jones, Mechanics Of Composite Materials (Materials Science & Engineering

Series), Taylor & Francis, 2015.
WEBREOURCES:
121
ME18007 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart knowledge on the design principles, properties of materials, fits and tolerances
and datum features.
• To expose the concepts and the factors influence on form design
• To inculcate the design features to facilitate design for machinability, economy,
accessibility and assembly.
• To infuse the knowledge on design for Manual Assembly and Automatic assembly of a
product.
• To inject the knowledge on design of Environment with consideration of environment
regulations
General design principles for manufacturability - strength and mechanical factors, mechanisms
selection, evaluation method, Process capability - Feature tolerances Geometric tolerances -
Assembly limits -Datum features - Tolerance stacks.
UNIT II FACTORS INFLUENCING FORM DESIGN 13
Working principle, Material, Manufacture, Design- Possible solutions - Materials choice –
Influence of materials on form design - form design of welded members, forgings and
castings.
UNIT III COMPONENT DESIGN -MACHINING CONSIDERATION 8
Design features to facilitate machining - drills - milling cutters - keyways - Doweling
procedures, counter sunk screws - Reduction of machined area- simplification by separation -
simplification by amalgamation - Design for machinability - Design for economy - Design for
clampability – Design for accessibility.
UNIT IV DESIGN FOR ASSEMBLY 10
Design for assembly – Product design for manual assembly - Product design for automatic
assembly – Robotic assembly
UNIT V DESIGN FOR THE ENVIRONMENT 9
Introduction – Environmental objectives – Global issues – Regional and local issues – Basic
DFE methods – Design guide lines – Example application – Lifecycle assessment – Basic
method –AT&T’s environmentally responsible product assessment - Weighted sum
assessment method – Lifecycle assessment method – Techniques to reduce environmental
impact – Design to minimize material usage – Design for disassembly – Design for
recyclability – Design for manufacture – Design for energy efficiency – Design to regulations
and standards.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The Students will apply the concept of design principles, fits and tolerances.
• The students will determine the influencing factors in the form design.
• The students will execute the design considerations in machinability, economy,
accessibility and assembly.
• The students will apply the design principles for manual assembly and automatic
assembly of a product.
122
• The students will implement the environment regulations in design for manufacturing
and assembly
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Boothroyd, G, “Design for Assembly Automation and Product Design”, CRC Press,
2010.
2. Boothroyd, G, Heartz and Nike, “Product Design for Manufacture”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Fixel, J, “Design for the Environment”, McGraw Hill., 2011.
REFERENCES :
1. A K Chitale and R C Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, PHI, New

Delhi,2003.
2. Bralla, “Design for Manufacture handbook”, McGraw hill, 1999.
3. Dickson, John. R, and Corroda Poly, “Engineering Design and Design for Manufacture
and Structural Approach”, Field Stone Publisher, USA, 2001
4. Graedel T. Allen By. B, “Design for the Environment Angle Wood Cliff”, Prentice
Hall. Reason Pub., 1996
5. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, Second Edition, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:
123
ME18009 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide fundamental knowledge of different type of heat exchangers
• To provide knowledge of design of heat exchangers
• To impart knowledge in sizing and rating of the heat exchangers for various applications
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF HEAT EXCHANGER 5

Temperature distribution and its implications types – shell and tube heat exchangers –
regenerators and recuperators – analysis of heat exchangers – LMTD and effectiveness
method.
UNIT II DESIGN ASPECTS 13
Heat transfer and pressure loss – flow configuration – effect of baffles – effect of deviations
from ideality – design of double pipe - finned tube - shell and tube heat exchangers -
simulation of heat exchangers.
UNIT III HEAT PIPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 8
Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working fluids, wick structures,
control techniques. Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material selection,
preliminary design considerations.
UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 10
Types – merits and demerits – design of compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers –
performance influencing parameters - limitations.
UNIT V CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS 9
Design of surface and evaporative condensers – cooling tower – performance characteristics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will able to analyse the heat exchangers used in industries
2. Students will able to apply the principles in heat transfer equipment like heat
exchangers.
3. Students will be able to design high temperature pipes
4. Students will be able to select, compare and design the compact and plate heat
exchangers.
5. Students will be able to evaluate and design condensers and cooling tower.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1st Edition, 2011.
2. Sadik Kakac and Hongtan Liu, Heat Exchangers Selection, Rating and Thermal
Design, CRC Press, 2002.
REFERENCES :
124
1. Sekulic D.P., Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley, 2003.
2. Walker, Industrial Heat Exchangers - A Basic Guide, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1980
3. Hewitt G.F., Shires G.L. and Bott T.R., Process Heat Transfer, CRC Press, 1994.
4. Nicholas Cheremisioff, Cooling Tower, Ann Arbor Science Pub 1981.
5. Dunn, P. D. and Reay, D. A., Heat Pipes, Fourth Edition, Pergamon Press, Third
Edition 2013.
WEBREOURCES:
• http://www.nitc.ac.in/
125
ME 18011 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT
L T P C
RECOVERY
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To acquire knowledge about various aspects of energy conservation
• To learn about energy efficient buildings
• To learn about energy efficiency in various engineering equipment
• To learn about energy storage and waste heat recovery methods
UNIT I ASPECTS OF ENERGY CONSERVATION 6

Introduction to ENCON, Approach and modern techniques, benefits, trends. Energy
Conservation Technology (Thermal Energy). Energy Conservation in Energy Intensive
Industries. Techno-Economic evaluation of conservation technologies, Efficiency Improvements
Thermal Utilities: Boilers, Steam System, Thermic Fluid Heating Systems, Furnaces, Heating
and Melting Applications, Refractories etc,
UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS 9
Introduction, Definition and concepts, Energy and Water as a resource, Criticality of resources
and needs of modern living. Envelop heat loss and heat gain and its evaluation, Thermal
Comport improvement methods, Optimum performance, Other building comports, IAQ
requirements, Electrical Energy Conservation, Opportunities and Techniques for energy
conservation in Buildings. Adoption to sustainable resources, process and Technologies. Green
Buildings, Intelligent Buildings, Rating of Buildings, Efficient Use of Buildings, Solar Passive
Architecture. Eco-housing concepts and National and International norms.
UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL EQUIPMENT 12
Boilers: Types, combustion in boilers, performances evaluation, analysis of losses, feed water
treatment, blow down, energy conservation opportunities. Boiler efficiency calculation,
evaporation ratio and efficiency for coal, oil and gas. Soot blowing and soot deposit reduction,
reasons for boiler tube failures, start up, shut down and preservation, Thermic fluid heaters, super
critical boilers; Steam System: Properties of steam, assessment of steam distribution losses,
steam leakages, steam trapping, condensate and flash steam recovery system, identifying
opportunities for energy savings. Steam utilization, Performance assessment more details,
installation, thermo-compressor, steam pipe insulation, condensate pumping, steam dryers;
Furnaces: Classification, general fuel economy measures in furnaces, excess air, heat
distribution, temperature control, draft control, waste heat recovery. Forging furnace heat
balance, Cupola, non-ferrous melting, Induction furnace, performance evaluation of a furnace,
hot air generators; Insulation and Refractories: Insulation-types and application, economic
thickness of insulation, heat savings and application criteria, Refractory-types, selection and
application of refractories, heat loss. Cold insulation; Heat Exchangers: Types, networking,
pinch analysis, multiple effect evaporators, condensers, distillation column, etc.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGE 9
Need and importance of Energy storage in Conventional and Nonconventional Energy Systems.
Technical Aspects (Measurements, Quantify) Various forms of Energy Storage: Thermal,
Chemical, Mechanical, Electrical and Nuclear Techno Commercial Analysis (Economical
aspects), Energy Storage: Devices and Systems.
UNIT V WASTE HEAT RECOVERY 9
Classification, advantages and applications, commercially viable waste heat recovery devices,
saving potential. Sources of waste heat and its potential applications, Waste heat survey and
126
measurements, Data collection, Limitations and affecting. Cogeneration: Definition, need,
application, advantages, classification, saving potentials. Heat balance, steam turbine efficiency,
tri-generation, micro turbine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to recognize energy conservation issues.
2. The students will be able to select and design the energy efficient buildings.
3. Students will be able to apply energy conservation ideas to a variety of industrial
thermal equipment.
4. Students will be able to apply energy storage systems that are appropriate for their
needs.
5. Students will be able to conduct a waste heat survey and, propose a viable recovery
scheme.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Eastop T.D and Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”,
Logman Scientific and Technical, 1990.
2. Reay D.A, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1979.
REFERENCES:
1. Openshaw Taylor E, "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2003.

2. Donald R Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999.
3. Energy Audit Manual- The Practitioner’s Guide, EMC-Kerala and NPC 2017.
4. Bureau of Energy Efficiency -Energy Management Series, 2006.
WEB RESOURCES:
127
ME18013 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To provide Knowledge on various Modules of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
and Related Technologies.
• To learn the ERP Modules structure, Purchasing and Sales perspective.
• To understand the future direction of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ERP 9
Evolution of ERP, Various Modules of ERP- Advantage of ERP- Integrated Management
Information- Business Modeling- ERP for Small Business- ERP for Make to Order
Companies- Business Process Mapping for ERP Module- Design, Environment and its
Selection for ERP Implementation.
UNIT II ERP AND RELATED TECHNOLOGIES 9
Business Process Re-engineering, Management Information systems, Decision Support Systems-
Executive Information Systems- Advantages of EIS- Disadvantages of EIS- Data Warehousing- Data
Mining- On-Line Analytical Processing- Product Life Cycle Management- Supply Chain Management-
ERP Security.
UNIT III ERP MODULES STRUCTURE 9
Finance, Sales and Distribution, Manufacturing and Production Planning- Material and
Capacity Planning- Shop Floor Control- Quality Management- JIT/Repetitive Manufacturing-
Cost Management- Engineering Data Management- Engineering Change Control-
Configuration Management- Serialisation / Lot Control- Tooling- Human Resource.
UNIT IV PURCHASING AND SALES PERSPECTIVE 9
Role of ERP in Purchasing- Purchase Module- Features of purchase module- Benefits of
purchase module- ERP Purchase System- Role of ERP in Sales and Distribution- Sub-
Modules of the Sales and Distribution Module- Billing and sales support- Foreign trade-
Integration of Sales and Distribution Module.
UNIT V FUTURE DIRECTIONS IN ERP 9
New Trends in ERP- ERP to ERP II-Implementation of Organisation -Wide ERP, Development of
New Markets and Channels- Latest ERP Implementation Methodologies- case studies- ERP and E-
business.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will understand ERP concept, Business modeling, Business process and
mapping of business modules.
2. The students will apply ERP related technologies to information systems practiced in
an organization.
3. The students will study the ERP modules like finance, sales and distribution,
manufacturing and quality management.
4. Students will demonstrate a working knowledge of how data and transactions are
integrated in an ERP system to manage the sales order process, production process, and
procurement process.
128
5. Students will develop the future directions of ERP implementation in new market,
channels and E-business.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bret Wagne and Ellen F. Monk, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Cengage Learning-2008.
REFERENCES :
1. Sheikh Khalid, “Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II)

with Introduction to ERP, SCM and CRM”, Tata McGraw—Hill, New Delhi, 2001
2. Ellen F. Monk, Bret Wagner, “Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning”, Cengage
Learning-2017.
3. Christian N. Madu, “ERP and Supply Chain Management”, CHI,2005
4. Glynn C. Williams, ‘Implementing SAP ERP Sales &Distribution”, McGraw-Hill-
2017
WEB REOURCES:
• http://www.retawprojects.com/uploads/An-Overview-Enterprise-Resource-
Planning__ERP.pdf
129
CS 18052 FUNDAMENTALS OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C
(COMMON TO EE & CS) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
• To learn about the different search strategies in AI
• To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
• To know about the various applications of AI.
• To introduce the concepts of Expert Systems.
Introduction–Definition - Future of Artificial Intelligence – Characteristics of Intelligent Agents – Typical
Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to Typical AI problems - Production system characteristics
-Specialized production systems.
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9
Problem solving Methods - Search Strategies- Uninformed - Informed - Heuristics - Local Search
Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial Observations – Constraint Satisfaction
Problems – Constraint Propagation - Backtracking Search - Game Playing – Optimal Decisions in Games
– Stochastic Games.
UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9
First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Unification – Forward Chaining-Backward
Chaining – Resolution – Structured representation of knowledge.
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9
AI applications – Language Models – Information Retrieval- Information Extraction – Natural Language
Processing - Machine Translation – Speech Recognition – Robot – Hardware – Perception – Planning –
Moving.
UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
Expert systems - Architecture of expert systems, Roles of expert systems - Knowledge Acquisition – Meta
knowledge, Heuristics. Typical expert systems - MYCIN, DART, XCON, Expert systems shells.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. To understand the characteristics of Intelligent agents, define AI and learn about
production systems.
2. Learn to use appropriate search strategies for solving AI problems.
3. Understand, represent knowledge and use first order logic in solving AI problems.
4. To know about current applications of AI and compare some of them.
5. To design an expert system from the concepts learned.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach” , Prentice Hall, Third
Edition, 2009.
2. Kevin Night and Elaine Rich, Nair B., “Artificial Intelligence (SIE)”, Mc Graw Hill- 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. M. Tim Jones, Artificial Intelligence: A Systems Approach (Computer Science), Jones and
Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008
130
2. Nils J. Nilsson, ―The Quest for Artificial Intelligence‖, Cambridge University Press,2009.
3. Peter Jackson, “Introduction to Expert Systems”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. Deepak Khemani “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Education 2013.
131
GE18051 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the process and need for protecting technology innovations through Intellectual
Property Rights.
UNIT I TECHNOLOGICAL INNOVATIONS 10

The process of technological innovation - factors contributing to successful technological
innovation - the need for creativity and innovation - problem solving and creativity through brain
storming - different techniques - Selection criteria - screening ideas for new products - evaluation
techniques. Protection of IP as a factor in R&D and few case studies.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO IPR & RELATED AGREEMENTS 8

AND TREATIES
Types of IP: Patents, Trademarks, Copyright & Related Rights, Industrial Design,
Traditional Knowledge, Geographical Indications. History of GATT & TRIPS Agreement;
Madrid Agreement; Hague Agreement; WIPO Treaties; Budapest Treaty; PCT; Indian Patent Act
1970 & recent amendments.
UNIT III BASICS OF PATENTS AND CONCEPT OF PRIOR ART 10

Introduction to Patents; Types of patent applications: Ordinary, PCT, Conventional,
Divisional and Patent of Addition; Specifications: Provisional and complete; Forms and fees
Invention in context of “prior art”; Patent databases; Searching International Databases;
Country-wise patent searches, USPTO, EPO, PATENT Scope (WIPO), IPO, etc.)
UNIT IV PATENT FILING PROCEDURES 9

National & PCT filing procedure; Time frame and cost; Status of the patent applications filed;
Precautions while patenting – disclosure/non-disclosure; Financial assistance for patenting -
introduction to existing schemes Patent licensing and agreement Patent infringement- meaning,
scope, litigation, case studies
UNIT V PATENT RIGTS AND NEW DEVELOPMENTS IN IPR 8

Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent information and databases.
Geographical Indications. New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Understand the process of problem solving through technological innovations.
• Selecting the appropriate IPR elements for protecting intellectual property.
• Understand the concept of prior art search and performing it.
• Understand the procedure for filing patent.
• Understand and apply the scope of patent rights for licensing and transfer of technology.
132
TEXT BOOKS:
Adair, J. “Effective Innovation”, 1st Ed., Macmillan Publishing, 2003
1.
2. BAREACT, Indian Patent Act 1970 Acts & Rules, Universal Law Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,
2007
3. Ramappa, T. “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008
REFERENCES:
1. Nystrom, H. Creativity and Innovation, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
2. Kankanala C., Genetic Patent Law & Strategy, 1st Edition, Manupatra Information Solution Pvt. Ltd.,
2007
3. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell and Mark A. Lemley, “Intellectual Property in New
Technological Age”, Aspen Publishers, 2016.
133
ME 18015 LEAN SIX SIGMA L T P C
2 0 0 1
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on the Lean manufacturing concepts.
• To expertise in the implementation of lean metrics, VSM and all lean assessments.
• To gain knowledge on the six sigma principles, tools and its techniques.
• To inculcate the knowledge on the application of Six Sigma principles of three phases to
improve the quality of process outputs.
• To induce a knowledge on the analyze and control the processes using six sigma
concepts.
UNIT I LEAN MANUFACTURING 9

Evolution of lean; traditional versus lean manufacturing; ford production system concept of lean;
Toyota’s foray in lean, Customer Need; lean tools- Process mapping value stream management-
3 M; 7 types of Muda; 7 major losses reduction. cell layout; line balancing; concept of kaizen;
steps involved in kaizen deployment; kanban concepts; types of Kanban; and practical
application; push vs pull; changeover time reduction - single minute exchange of die; concept of
TPM; poka-yoke; 5S; maintenance - preventive, time based and condition based; autonomous
maintenance, JIT, Autonomation, DFMA
UNIT II LEAN METRICS 9
Identify lean metrics; kaizen cloud identification in VSM; lean assessment. improving targets and
benchmarks.
UNIT III SIX SIGMA , TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9
SIPCO,QFD; voice of the customer, kano models, , cost of poor quality (COPQ), statistical
process control, DMAIC
UNIT IV SIX SIGMA DEFINE, MEASURE AND ANALYSE PHASE 9
DMAIC phases, overview, project charter – voice of the customer – high level process map –
project team – case study, types of measures – introduction to statistical methods – sampling plan
– data collection – choosing statistical software – measure tools – process maps, pareto charts,
cause and effect diagrams, histograms, six sigma measurements – measurement system analysis
– process capability calculations. Analyze – process analysis – hypothesis testing – statistical
tests and tables – tools for analyzing relationships among variables – survival analysis.
UNIT V IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE 9
Process redesign – generating improvement alternatives – design of experiments – pilot
experiments – cost/benefit analysis – implementation plan. Control phase control plan – process
scorecard – failure mode and effects analysis – final project report and documentation. DMADV,
DFSS–six sigma in manufacturing and services case studies & Sustainability of Lean Six Sigma.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will apply lean Manufacturing concepts and related tools in industrial cases
for eliminating the wastes.
2. The students will apply the lean metrics and develop current value stream mapping for
134
the system and with lean assessments it will be evaluated.
3. The students will elucidate six sigma principles, tools and its techniques. Also will
develop steps to incorporate them
4. The students will apply and experiment the implementation of define, measure and
analyse phases of six sigma methods in any given system.
5. The students will apply and analyse the improve and control phases of six sigma in any
given system.
REFERENCES :
1. Gopalakrishnan N, Simplified Lean Manufacture: Elements, rules, tools and

implementation, Prentice Hall of India, NewDelhi 2013.
2. James P. Womack , Daniel T. Jones ,Lean Thinking, Free press business,2013.
3. Kai Yang and Basemel-Haik, “Design for Six-Sigma: A Roadmap for Product
Development”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. Michael L. George, David Rowlands, Bill Kastle ,What is Lean Six Sigma, Tata
McGrawHill,2003.
5. James P. Womack , Daniel T. Jones ,Lean Thinking, Free press business,2013.
WEB RESOURCES:
135
ME18017 MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the students to learn about the sources of vibration and noise in mechanical
systems
• To prepare the students to do design modifications so as to reduce the vibration and
noise and improve the life of the components.
UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM 9

Introduction - Types of Vibration - Sources of vibration-Mathematical Models - Calculation of
Natural Frequencies - Single degree freedom systems with and without damping- Torsional
Vibration systems.
UNIT II MULTI DEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM 9
Calculation of Natural Frequencies – Two degree freedom system - Three degree freedom
system- Dunkerley Method -Holzer Method – Vibration of Continuous System
UNIT III BASICS OF NOISE 9
Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound pressure level, addition, subtraction
and averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise,
measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality
analysis.
UNIT IV SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9
Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis,
palliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures,
sound energy absorption, sound transmission through barriers.
UNIT V VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL 9
Vibration Measuring Devices: Transducers, vibration pickups –Frequency measuring
instruments: single reed, multi reed and stroboscope- Vibration isolation, Tuned absorbers, un-
tuned viscous dampers and damping treatments.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will develop the mathematical model and calculate the natural frequency
of single degree freedom systems.
• The students will evaluate the natural frequency of multi degree freedom systems.
• The students will relate the Noise and its related terms.
• The students will analyse and control the sources of noises in various automotive
systems.
• The students will select suitable methods for controlling the vibration of mechanical
systems
TEXT BOOKS:
136
1. Julian Happian and Smith, “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”, Butterworth -
Heinemann, 2012.
2. Rao, S.S., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, Sixth edition, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. David A Bies and Colin H Hansen, “Engineering Noise Control – Theory and
Practice”, Taylor & Francis, Fourth Edition, 2009.
2. Dukkipati R.V, “Advanced Mechanical Vibrations”, Prentice Hall India Learning
Private Limited, 2012
3. Groover, G.K, “Mechanical Vibrations”, New Chand and Bros, Roorkee, 2014.
4. Kelly S. G, “Mechanical Vibrations”, McGraw Hill (India) Limited, 2015.
5. Ramamurti. V, “Mechanical Vibration Practice with Basic Theory”, Narosa, New
Delhi,2012.
WEBSITE RESOURCES:
137
ME 18019 L T P C
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND EVALUATION
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To study and understand the various on non-destructive testing methods and evaluation of defects
on the surface
• To learn techniques involving thermal energy and sound energy
• To learn about techniques involving high energy radiation
• To understand the industrial applications of non destructive testing (NDT)
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 9
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the
detection of manufacturing defects as well as material characterization. Relative merits and
limitations, Visual inspection – Unaided and aided.
UNIT II SURFACE TESTING METHODS 9
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers,
advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results.
Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials, Magnetization methods,
Interpretation and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization,
Residual magnetism.
UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY & EDDY CUURENT TESTING 9
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for
applying liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors,
Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents,
Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation,
Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC & ACOUSTIC EMISSION TESTING 9
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam
and angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array
Ultrasound, Time of Flight Diffraction. Acoustic Emission Technique –Principle, AE
parameters, Applications
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY 9
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use
of filters and screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films - graininess,
density, speed, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic
equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will be able to understand the importance of various nondestructive testing
methods.
138
2. The students will be able to evaluate superficial and surface defects and the procedure
involved in its detection
3. The students will be able to analyze the defects of materials through Thermography and
Eddy current testing methods
4. The students will be able to evaluate the importance of acoustic and ultrasonic energy
based NDT method
5. The students will be able to analyze the industrial component defect using
electromagnetic rays.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T, Jayakumar, M, Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”,
Narosa Publishing House, 2012.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New
Age International Publishers, 2010.
REFERENCES :
1. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American
Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.
2. Charles, J. Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York
2001.
3. Paul, E.Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Edition
New Jersey, 2005
HAND BOOKS:
1. ASNT (American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio) NDT Handbook,
Vol. 1, Leak Testing
Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing
Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing
Vol. 4, Radiographic Testing
Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing
Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission Testing
Vol. 7, Ultrasonic Testing
WEB RESROURCES:
139
ME 18021 PLANT LAYOUT DESIGN AND ERGONOMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To equip the students with adequate knowledge of plant layout and material handling
activities carried out in industries
• To explain the general principles that govern the interaction of humans and their working
environment for improving worker performance.
• To learn principles of ergonomics and methods of ergonomical design
UNIT I PLANT LAYOUT 8
Need for a layout study- Generic steps involved- Types of layout-Product, Process, Fixed
Position, Combined layouts- Factors Influencing layout- Objectives of layout problems- Steps in
layout design - Plant layout Procedure – Steps and Approaches.
UNIT II MATERIAL HANDLING 9
Introduction, Need, Definition and terminologies, types, elements, Material Handling systems,
Material Handling principles, Classification of Material Handling Equipment, Relationship of
material handling to plant layout , Inbound logistics and outbound logistics, Process flow
charting/mapping techniques.
UNIT III PLANT LAYOUT DESIGN 10
Layout study - Classification of layout , Layout procedure – Nadler’s ideal system approach,
Immer’s basic steps, Apple’s layout procedure, Reed’s layout procedure Systematic Layout
planning (SLP), Computerized layout planning procedure – ALDEP, CORELAP, CRAFT;
Trends in computerized layout .
UNIT IV ERGONOMICS 9
Definition – applications of ergonomic principles in the shop floor – work benches – seating
arrangements – layout of electrical panels- switch gears – principles of motion economy –
location of controls – display locations – machine foundations – work platforms, fatigue,
physical and mental strain – incidents of accident – physiology of workers.
UNIT V ERGONOMICS IN DESIGN 9
Psycho physiological Data – Anthropometry, information displays – Man Machine System -
Working Environment –chair and table heights. Strength and force of body movements - Work
station design methods, Evaluation procedures of REBA, RULA.
.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to classify the procedures of plant layout and the steps involved in
it.
2. Will outline various material handling equipment used in manufacturing industries
3. Students will illustrate types of layout procedure and illustrate steps in layout design.
4. Students will be able to examine how ergonomic factors affect productivity in a
workplace.
5. Students will be able to apply ergonomics concepts in design and interpret different
140
posture analysis by using REBA/RULA tools
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bridger , R.S, “Introduction to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, CRC Press, Fourth
Edition ,2017
2. James M. Apple, “Plant Layout and Material Handling” John Wiley, 3rd Edition,
1977
REFERENCES :
1. Franics, R.L., and White, J.A, “Facility layout and Location”, Prentice Hall of
India,2002
2. James M Moore, “Plant layout and design”, Macmillan, New York, 1962
3. Martin Helander, “A guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, TMH, 2006
4. Philips, Chandler .A, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000
5. Tompkins, White et.al, “Facilities Planning”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2003
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/711e.html
141
ME 18023 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To Provide an overview of Power Plants and the role of Mechanical Engineers in their
operation and maintenance
• To understand the underlying principles of operations in Diesel and Gasifier system.
• To impart overall knowledge on different types of nuclear power plants, tariff systems
and pollution control.
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 12

Rankine cycle -improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC
Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, All types of valves, Boiler Safety valves and relief valves, Pipes
and tubes for boiler pressure parts, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants –
Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration
systems.
UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER 8
PLANTS
Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated
Gasifier based Combined Cycle systems
UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 7
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), Canada
Deuterium-Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.
Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 10
Hydro Electric Power Plants –Classification, Typical Layout and associated components
including Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, OTEC, Solar Photo
Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF 8
POWER PLANTS
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection
criteria, relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution
control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants -
ESP-Electro Static Preceptor - Repair & Maintenance cost and selling cost.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to describe various sources of energy and types of power plants.
2. Students are capable to analyze different types of steam cycles and it’s efficiencies for a
steam power plant.
3. Students will be familiar with Diesel, and Integrated Gasifier power plants.
4. Students will interpret various types of nuclear reactors and hydraulic power plant and
their components.
142
5. Students will evaluate various performance parameters associated with power plant
systems and interpret economics of power generation and pollution control methods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw –Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., 2014.
REFERENCES
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw –Hill Publishing Company
2. Ltd., 2010.
3. Black & Veatch, "Power Plant Engineering",, Springer Publications,1996.
4. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering”,
Second Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw –Hill, 1998.
5. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University
Press,2012.
6. N.K. Bansal, Non-Conventional Energy Resources, Vikas Publishing House, 2014.
WEB RESOURCES:
143
GE18551 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
(COMMON TO EC, AE, BT, EE & ME) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To enable the students to gain knowledge about various theories of management from
classical to contemporary approaches.
• To enrich the students with the concepts of all management functions and to make them
understand the significance of proper implementation of these functions for the success of
the organization.
• To make the students to realize the importance of effective communication for successful
implementations of management functions in the organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management –Nature of Management-Management as Science or Art-Management
and Administration-Evolution of Management-Contribution of Taylor and Fayol– types of
managers - managerial roles and skills - Organization Culture – Dimensions, strong and weak
culture –External Environment -.specific and general environment – Understanding the global
environment.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Steps Involved in planning process – Types of plans –
management by objectives – Strategic management process– types of corporate strategies -
Planning Tools and Techniques-Forecasting – Benchmarking - Decision making steps and
process
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization –– Line and staff authority – delegation
of authority – departmentalization by different strategies - centralization and decentralization –
span of control- Human Resource Management – External factors - HR Planning - Recruitment
and Decruitment - selection – selection tools – Orientation – Employee training - Employee
Performance Management – Appraisal methods - Compensation and benefits.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective
communication.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
Types of control systems: Market, Bureaucratic, Clan- Importance of control - process of
controlling – Types of control: Feed forward, Concurrent, Feedback -Qualities of effective
control system – Factors affecting control – controlling for organizational performance – control
techniques -budget - Program evaluation and review technique – Information technology in
controlling: opportunities and challenges.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to apply managerial approaches and practice managerial roles as
demanded by the current environment of the organization.
2. Students will be able to develop planning process and apply strategies, planning tools and
144
techniques to attain organizational objectives.
3. Students will be able to effectively organize activities in the organization and execute
human resource management tasks.
4. Students will be able to execute the appropriate motivational and leadership techniques
and effectively utilize communication methods in the organization.
5. Students will be able to apply control techniques to monitor the progress of activities and
to take corrective measures accordingly.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robbins, Mary Coulter and Agna Fernandez, “Management”, 14th Edition,
Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
2. Stephen A. Robbins, David A. Decenzo, Sanghamitra, Bhattacharyya, Madhushree
Nanda Agarwal “Fundamentals of Management” 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
REFERENCES :
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” 10th edition, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2015.
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
3. Heinz Weihrich, Mark V Cannice, and Harold Koontz “Management: A Global,
Innovative and Entrepreneurial Perspective”, 15th Edition, McGrawHill, 2019.
WEB RESOURCES
145
ME 18025 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
1. To describe the concept of method study and work measurement techniques.
2. To demonstrate the process planning activities that is followed in
manufacturing industries.
3. To estimate the unit cost of a product.
4. To find the time required for manufacturing a product.
UNIT I WORK STUDY AND METHOD STUDY 9
Definition, advantages and procedure of work study – Definition, objectives and procedure of
method study. Symbols, flow process charts, flow diagram, machine chart, Process Charts. Work
measurement: Time Study and work sampling – Principles of motion economy. Therblig
symbols, SIMO chart simple problems.
UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9
Drawing interpretation – Material evaluation and process selection – Production equipment and
tooling selection – Process parameters – Work holding devices – Documents for Process
planning.
UNIT III ECONOMICS OF PROCESS PLANNING 9
Manufacturing cost – Cost strategies – Costing – Materials and its costs – Manufacturing
processes and its costs – Cost comparison – Make or Buy decision – Case studies and Problems.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9
Elements of Cost – Determination of product weight and material cost – Labour Cost –
Determination of Direct Labour Cost – Depreciation, Causes of depreciation, Methods of
depreciation calculation – Administrative expenses – Selling and Distributing expenses –
Allocation of overhead expenses – Methods of Estimation – Break Even Analysis for optimum
process selection.
UNIT V PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9
Estimation of Forging Cost – Estimation of cost for Gas cutting, Arc Welding and Gas Welding
– Estimation in Foundry Shop, pattern cost, casting cost – Estimation in sheet metal shop –
Estimation of machining time and cost for Lathe operations – Drilling and Boring – Milling.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Understand the method study and work measurement techniques and through which they
will calculate the standard time.
2. Prepare a process planning sheet by selecting appropriate material, processes, machines,
equipment’s, tools and work holding devices.
3. Compare the cost of various methods to select the best one.
4. Estimate the unit cost of a product by considering various expenditures like manpower,
material, plant, administration, sales, etc.
5. Compute the cycle time required for manufacturing a product by adopting various
production techniques.
146
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter Scallan, “Process planning: The Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier Science &
Technology Books, Dec 2002.
REFERENCES :
1. Chitale.A.V, and Gupta.R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2002.
2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John
Wiley, 1998.
3. Phillip.F. Ostwalal and Jairo Munez, “Manufacturing Processes’ and Systems”, John
Wiley, 9 th Edition, 1998.
4. Russell.R.S and Tailor,B.W., “operations Management”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2003.
5. Sinha.B.P., “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, Publishing Co.,
1995.
WEB RESOURCES:
147
ME 18027 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the underlying principles of operations in different Refrigeration systems.
• This course will give an overall knowledge on different Air conditioning systems
• To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems
Introduction to Refrigeration - Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants
Desirable properties – Classification – Nomenclatures.
UNIT II VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 10
Vapor compression cycle : p-h and T-s diagrams - deviations from theoretical cycle – subcooling
and super heating- effects of condenser and evaporator pressure on COP- multipressure system -
low temperature refrigeration - Cascade systems – problems. Equipment’s: Type of
Compressors, Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators.
UNIT III OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 8
Working principles of Vapor absorption systems and adsorption cooling systems – Steam jet
refrigeration- Ejector refrigeration systems- Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration -
Magnetic Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems
UNIT IV PSYCHROMETRIC PROPERTIES AND PROCESSES 10
Properties of moist Air-Gibbs Dalton law, Specific humidity, Dew point temperature, Degree of
saturation, Relative humidity, Enthalpy, Humid specific heat, Wet bulb temperature
Thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart; Psychrometric of air-conditioning
processes, mixing of air streams.
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND LOAD ESTIMATION 12
Air conditioning loads: Outside and inside design conditions; Heat transfer through structure,
Solar radiation, Electrical appliances, Infiltration and ventilation, internal heat load; Apparatus
selection; fresh air load, human comfort & IAQ principles, effective temperature & chart,
calculation of summer & winter air conditioning load; Classifications, Layout of plants; Air
distribution system; Filters; Air Conditioning Systems with Controls: Temperature, Pressure and
Humidity sensors, Actuators & Safety controls.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students can interpret the basic concepts of Refrigeration.
2. The students can solve analytical problems in Vapor Compression Refrigeration systems
3. The students will be familiar with the various types of Refrigeration systems and its
psychrometric processes.
4. The students can design and analyze various refrigeration and air conditioning systems
5. The students can estimate the loads of Air conditioning systems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
148
2. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J. W., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 2nd edition,
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1982.
REFERENCES :
1. Roy J. Dossat, "Principles of Refrigeration", 4th edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2009.
2. ASHRAE Hand book, Fundamentals, 2017
3. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, New ,
2010.
4. Ananta Narayanan P.N, “Basic Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, 4th Edition, Tata
Mc GrawHill, 2013.
5. Jones W.P, “Air conditioning engineering”, 5th edition, Elsevier, Butterworth
Hinenmann Publication, 2005.
WEB RESOURCES
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105129/
149
ME18029 RENEWABLE ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
(COMMON TO ME & MR) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To identify the methods and technologies for effective utilization of solar energy, wind
energy and biomass.
• To acquire knowledge about wind energy conversion techniques.
• To learn how biomass could become an energy source.
• To know the energy available in various hydro and geo-based sources in the world and its
conversion
• To get educated about various new forms of energy and its effective usage.
UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9

Introduction – Renewable vs non-renewable sources of energy, Solar Radiation; Solar collectors -
Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors; Solar Applications – power generation, green houses,
space heating and cooling; Solar Cells - Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic Cells, Power
Generation & Applications
9
UNIT II WIND ENERGY
Wind Energy – Wind data, site selection, power available in wind, Betz criterion; Wind energy
conversion – Principle, evolution of wind mills, Vertical and Horizontal axis wind mills,
Construction and working, Safety and failure.
UNIT III BIO ENERGY 9

Bioenergy – Introduction, energy crops, Biomass, Municipal & Industrial waste stream,
Conversion techniques – Physical means, direct combustion, Thermo chemical and biochemical
methods, Biomass gasifiers, Digesters, Ethanol production, Bio diesel.
UNIT IV HYDRO ENERGY 9

Tidal energy, Ocean Thermal energy - Open and Closed OTEC Cycles, Geothermal Energy, Small
Hydro energy and conversion techniques.
UNIT V OTHER NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Hydrogen – Production & Storage; Fuel Cell – principle, construction, working and limitations of
Alkali, Molten Carbonate, Solid Oxide, Phosphoric acid, Proton Exchange Membrane fuel cells.
Super capacitors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will have the ability to identify techniques used in direct and indirect usage of
solar energy.
2. Students will be able to present effective methods to harvest and convert wind energy into
useful forms
3. Students will be able to recommend a suitable method for deriving energy from various bio
150
masses
4. Students will have the ability to explain conversion techniques for effective utilization of
hydro and geo-based renewable sources
5. Students will be able to summarize the techniques involved in utilization of energy from
new resources like hydrogen.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai. G.D., "Non Conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., "Renewable Energy Sources", EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Energy", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,
1997.
2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University
Press, U.K., 1996.
3. Tiwari. G.N., Solar Energy –"Fundamentals Design, Modeling & Applications", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Freris. L.L., "Wind Energy Conversion Systems", Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
5. David M. Mousdale – "Introduction to Biofuels", CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group,
USA 2010
6. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaics - Fundamentals, Technologies and
Applications", PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015
WEB RESOURCES:
• https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121106014/
• http://www.iff-training.com/event/mechanics-of-renewable-energy-training-
course?utm_source=google&utm_medium=cpc&utm_content=homepage&xtssot=0
151
ME18031 SURFACE ENGINEERING AND TRIBOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on surface engineering and surface modification methods that will
come in handy to solve the industrial problems. This will also serve as a precursor for future
research in the same field.
• To impart knowledge in the friction, wear, and lubrication aspects of machine components.
• To understand the material properties which influence the tribological characteristics of
surfaces
UNIT I SURFACE INTERACTION AND FRICTION 8

Topography of Surfaces – Surface features – Properties and measurement – Surface interaction –
Adhesive Theory of Sliding Friction – Rolling Friction – Friction properties of metallic and non-
metallic materials – friction in extreme conditions.
UNIT II WEAR 9
Introduction – Abrasive wear, Erosive, Cavitation, Adhesion, Fatigue wear and Fretting Wear-
Laws of wear – Theoretical wear models – Wear of metals and non metals – International
standards in friction and wear measurements.
UNIT III CORROSION 10
Introduction – Principle of corrosion – Classification of corrosion – Types of corrosion – Factors
influencing corrosion – Testing of corrosion – In-service monitoring, Simulated service,
Laboratory testing – Evaluation of corrosion – Prevention of Corrosion – Material selection,
Alteration of environment, Cathodic and Anodic Protection.
UNIT IV SURFACE TREATMENTS 10
Introduction – Surface properties, Superficial layer – Changing surface metallurgy – Wear
resistant coatings and Surface treatments – Techniques – PVD – CVD – Physical CVD – Ion
implantation – Thermal spraying – Laser surface hardening and alloying, Applications of
coatings and surface treatments in wear and friction control –New trends in coating technology –
DLC – CNC – Thick coatings – Nano-engineered coatings – Corrosion resistant coatings.
UNIT V LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION REGIMES 8
Lubricants and their physical properties – Viscosity and other properties of oils – Additives and
selection of Lubricants – Lubricant standards ISO, SAE, AGMA, BIS standards – Lubrication
Regimes – Solid Lubrication – Hydrodynamic lubrication – Hydrostatic lubrication – Gas
lubrication.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students can apply the concept of constructing the hydraulic models for motors and
control valves.
2. Students will be able to make use of the theories and mechanisms of various types of
wear
3. Students will apply and solve the industrial problems that arise related to Corrosion of
surfaces
4. Students will be able to analyze the material / surface properties based on the functions of
tribological requirements and surface modification methods/treatments.
5. Students will select suitable lubricants and lubrication regimes for different operating
conditions.
152
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Basu. S.K, Sengupta. S.N and Ahuja. B.B, ”Fundamentals of Tribology” Prentice – Hall
of India Pvt Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.
2. Cameron, A. “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Ellis Herward Ltd., UK, 1981.
3. Fontana G., “Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1985.
4. Halling, J, “Principles of Tribology”, Macmillan – 1984.
5. Rabinowicz.E, “Friction and Wear of materials”, John Willey &Sons ,UK,1995.
6. Stachowiak.G.W and Batchelor.A.W, “Engineering Tribology”, Butterworth -
Heinemann, UK, 2005.
7. Williams J.A. “Engineering Tribology”, Oxford Univ. Press, 1994.
REFERENCES :
1. Avraham Harnoy, “Bearing Design in Machinery: Engineering Tribology and

Lubrication”, Dekker 2007.
2. Giovanni Straffelini, “Friction and Wear: Methodologies for Design and Control”,
Springer 2015.
3. Michael Khonsari.M, “Applied Tribology: Bearing Design and Lubrication”,
WileyBlackwell; 2nd Revised edition, 2008.
4. Stolarsk.T.A, “Tribology in Machine Design, Butterworth”, – Heinemann, UK, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:
153
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II,III, VI ( To be chosen during EVEN SEMESTER )
ME 18002 3D PRINTING AND DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To learn about additive manufacturing
• To learn various additive manufacturing (AM) processes
• To understand various post processing methods in AM
• To learn various applications of AM in various fields
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction to AM, AM evolution, Distinction between AM & CNC machining, Advantages of
AM, AM process chain: Conceptualization, CAD, conversion to STL, Transfer to AM, STL file
manipulation, Machine setup, build, removal and clean up, post processing.
UNIT II AM PROCESSES 9
Liquid polymer system, discrete particle system, molten material systems, solid sheet system.
UNIT III DESIGN FOR AM 9
Motivation, DFMA concepts and objectives, AM unique capabilities, Exploring design
freedoms, Design tools for AM, Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts,
Inclusion of Undercuts and Other Manufacturing Constraining Features, Interlocking Features,
Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/ numbers etc. Guidelines for
process selection: selection methods for a part, challenges of selection, example system for
preliminary selection, production planning and control.
UNIT IV POST PROCESSING 9
Support material removal, surface texture improvement, accuracy improvement, aesthetic
improvement, preparation for use as a pattern, property enhancements using non-thermal and
thermal techniques.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF AM 9
Functional models, Pattern for investment and vacuum casting, Medical models, art models,
Engineering analysis models, Rapid tooling, new materials development, Bi-metallic parts, Re-
manufacturing. Application examples for Aerospace, defense, automobile, Bio-medical and
general engineering industries.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to understand principle of AM, file conversion and STL file
structure.
2. Students will be able to understand various additive manufacturing (AM) processes and
the process parameters and calculate the build time.
3. Students will be able to understand the various design requirements for Additive
Manufacturing.
4. Students will be able to understand various post processing methods in AM and select
suitable property enhancement techniques.
154
5. Students will be able to explain various applications of AM in various fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chua Chee Kai, Leong KahFai, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles & Applications”, World
Scientific, 2003.
2. Ian Gibson, David W Rosen, Brent Stucker., “Additive Manufacturing Technologies:
Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, 2010
REFERENCES :
1. Ali K. Kamrani, Emand Abouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory & Practice”, Springer,
2006.
2. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of
Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer 2001.
WEB RESOURCES:
2. https://learn-xpro.mit.edu/additive-
manufacturing?utm_medium=sem&utm_source=google&utm_campaign=amx&utm_ter
m=3d%20printing%20course&utm_content=aw-c
155
ME 18004 ADVANCED I.C ENGINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the underlying principles of operation of different IC Engines and
components.
• To provide knowledge on pollutant formation, control, alternate fuel etc.
• To give an in-depth knowledge of various sensors used in IC engine management
systems.
• To acquire the knowledge on recent trends in I.C. Engines.
UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9

Mixture requirements –Fuel injection systems –Mono point, Multipoint & Direct injection -
Stages of combustion –Normal and Abnormal combustion –Knock -Factors affecting knock –
Combustion chambers- Electronic spark timing and control.
UNIT II COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9
Diesel Fuel Injection Systems -Stages of combustion –Knocking –Factors affecting knock –
Direct and Indirect injection systems –Combustion chambers –Fuel Spray behavior –Spray
structure and spray penetration –Air motion -Introduction to Turbocharging.
UNIT III ALTERNATE FUELS & POLLUTANTS FORMATION AND 9
CONTROL
Alcohol, Hydrogen, Compressed Natural Gas-Properties, Suitability, Merits and Demerits -
Engine Modifications. Pollutant –Sources –Formation of Carbon Monoxide, Unburnt
hydrocarbon, Oxides of Nitrogen, Smoke and Particulate matter –Methods of controlling
Emissions
UNIT IV ENGINE ELECTRONICS 9
Application of Microprocessors in IC Engines-Sensors - Air flow, Pressure, Temperature, Speed,
Exhaust gas Oxygen, Knock and Position, Principle of operation, construction and its
characteristics.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9
Air assisted Combustion, Homogeneous charge compression ignition engines –Variable
Geometry turbochargers –Common Rail Direct Injection Systems –Gasoline Direct Injection
Engine, Hybrid Electric Vehicles – NOx Adsorbers - Onboard Diagnostics, Electrical Operated
Thermostat Operation in Automotive Engine Cooling System, Electronic Engine management
system.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students can understand the various operations and combustion chambers of spark
ignition engines
2. The students will be capable to analyze the various operations of compression ignition
engines, stratified charge engine, and low heat rejection engine
3. The students will be familiar with various alternate fuels for IC engines and also interpret
mechanism of various pollutant formation and their control.
156
4. The students can analyze the effects of various sensors in I.C engine systems.
5. The student can interpret the concepts of Electronic Engine Management systems and
recent trends in I.C Engines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech
Publications,2011.
2. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", V Edition, Tata Mc.Graw Hill, 2012.
3. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronic Systems”, 4th Edition, Taylor and
Francis Publications, 2004
REFERENCES :
1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons
2007.
2. Duffy Smith, "Auto Fuel Systems", The Good Heart Willcox Company, Inc., 2003.
3. Eric Chowenitz, "Automobile Electronics", SAE Publications, 1995.
4. B.P. Pundir, “IC Engines Combustion & Emission”, Narosa Publishing House, 2014.
5. John B. Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill, 1988.
WEB RESOURCES
157
ME 18006 AUTOMOBILE ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To create a learning on various automotive electronic components and its integration for
automotive development
• To provide a thorough understanding of the automotive systems, vehicle dynamics,
electrical and electronic systems used in automobiles
• To impart the knowledge of sensors and transducers used in advanced automobiles.
• To develop the ability to analyze, simulate, design and verify electronic systems for
controlling mechanical systems in automobiles.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOBILE ELECTRONICS 6
Components for electronic engine management system, open and closed loop control
strategies, PID control, Look up tables, introduction to modern control strategies like Fuzzy
logic and adaptive control. Parameters to be controlled in SI and CI engines.
UNIT II SENSORS AND ACTUATORS IN AUTOMOBILE 10
Variables to be Measured - Airflow Rate Sensor -Pressure Measurements - Engine Crankshaft
Angular Position Sensor - Magnetic Reluctance Position Sensor - Hall-Effect Position Sensor -
Optical Crankshaft Position Sensor -Throttle Angle Sensor Temperature Sensors - Typical
Coolant Sensor -Sensors for Feedback Control Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor - Oxygen Sensor
Improvements -Knock Sensors - Automotive Engine Control Actuators - Fuel Injection -
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Actuator - Variable Valve Timing - VVP Mechanism Model -
Electric Motor Actuators - Brushless DC Motors - Stepper Motors - Ignition System - Ignition
Coil Operations.
UNIT III ENGINE CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEMS 10
Engine control functions- Digital Power train Control Systems – Digital Engine Control.
Control Modes for Fuel Control -Discrete Time Idle Speed Control EGR Control -Variable
Valve Timing Control - Electronic Ignition Control -Closed-Loop Ignition Timing -Spark
Advance Correction Scheme - Integrated Engine Control System -Secondary Air Management
- Evaporative Emissions Canister Purge -Automatic System Adjustment-System Diagnosis-
Summary of Control Modes -Engine Crank (Start) -Engine Warm-Up - Open-Loop Control -
Closed-Loop Control -Hard Acceleration -Deceleration and Idle -Fuel delivery systems, MPFI,
Ignition Systems, Compression Ignition Engines – Emission control Management – Hybrid
Power Plants – BAS Electronic stability program (ESP) - Electronic diesel control (EDC).
UNIT IV TRANSMISSION AND SAFETY SYSTEMS & DIAGNOSTICS 10
SYSTEMS
Transmission control – Autonomous cruise control – Braking control, ABS – Traction control,
ESP, ASR – Suspension control – Steering control – Stability control – Parking Assist Systems
– Safety Systems, SRS, Blind Spot Avoidance – Auto transmission electronic control,
Telematics. Automatic Navigation, Future Challenges-Electronic Control System Diagnostics
Service Bay Diagnostic Tool - Onboard Diagnostics -Model-Based Sensor Failure Detection -
Diagnostic Fault Codes - Onboard Diagnosis (OBD II) -Model-Based Misfire Detection
System -Expert Systems in Automotive Diagnosis Occupant Protection Systems.
UNIT V AUTOMOBILE INSTRUMENTATION AND INFOTAINMENT 9
Modern Automotive Instrumentation -Advantages of Computer-Based Instrumentation
Display Devices - LED - LCD - Flat Panel Display -Fuel Quantity Measurement - Coolant
158
Temperature Measurement - Oil Pressure Measurement - Vehicle Speed Measurement -High-
Speed Digital Communications (CAN) - CAN Network -Trip Information Computer -
Telematics -GPS Navigation -The GPS System Structure -Automotive Diagnostics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Illustrate and compare the various automobile sensor components and its working.
2. Familiarize and explore the various engine control and monitoring mechatronics
systems.
3. Evaluate and classify the automobile transmission safety systems and diagnostics.
4. Apply the knowledge to integrate of various components for building the various
automobile sub-systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert N Brady, “Automotive Computers and Digital Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall,
Eagle Wood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1988.
REFERENCES :
1. Crouse W.H. “Automobile Electrical Equipment” McGraw Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York 3rd edition, 1986.
2. R.K. Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 1999
3. Tom Weather Jr. and Cland C. Hunter, “Automotive Computers and Control System”
Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1984.
4. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Kindle edition-Butter
worth Heinemann Woburn, 2017.
5. Young A.P. and Griffths, L., “Automobile Electrical Equipment” English Language
Book Society and New Press, 1990.
WEB RESOURCES:
• https://www.automotivelectronics.com/
159
ME18008 BIOGAS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To acquire knowledge on production, processing and application of Biogas and Municipal
solid waste.
• To design, construct and operate the biogas plants
• To aware the application of biogas in energy production
Bio-Energy. Overview of biogas technology. Technical status of biogas technology. Economic
viability of biogas technology. Diffusion status of biogas technology in developing countries.
Biogas technology scenario in India.
UNIT II BIO-REACTORS 10
Types of bio-reactors- Constant pressure type reactors, Ganesh model, Pragathi model, Astra
model, Jwala biogas plant, Batch digester, Manawat digester, German designs, plastic bag
digesters, free fabricated steel/plastic digesters, Tunnel type digester, Maya Farms model, Large
Farm biogas plants, Anaerobic Contact reactors, Anaerobic Filter reactors.
UNIT III DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION 9
OF BIOGAS PLANTS
Design of the digester. Design based on End Use requirements. Scaling of biogas plants - GTZ
method - digester sizing for a given end use device efficiency. Optimal design -KVIC. Design of
fixed Dome type of digesters. Material estimates for fixed dome plants. Selection of type and size
of biogas reactors and their specifications. Constructional aspects. Operational problems in
biogas plants methods of improving plant productivity. Measuring and test programs.
UNIT IV APPLICATION OF BIOGAS SYSTEMS 9
Biogas as an alternative energy source. Biogas utilization. Biogas burners. Design of biogas
burners. Stove models. Lighting mantles. Biogas using stationary power plants. Mobile power
plants. Pollution control through anaerobic digestion.
UNIT V BIOGAS FROM MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE 8
Compost and Biogas- biochemical degradation, Anaerobic processing, stages in composting,
composting technologies. Environmental effects of composting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will select the materials for biogas production and their by-products.
2. The students will apply the principle of biogas reactors and bio-plants.
3. The students will design, construct and operate the biogas plants
4. The students will implement the biogases in power generation
5. The students will apply the processes of composting and composting technologies of
MSW.
160
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai G D, Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 2011.
2. Khandelwal K C and Mahdi S S, Biogas Technology, Vol. I, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986.
REFERENCES :
1. McDougall, F. R., White, P. R., Franke, M., and Hindle, P. Integrated Solid Waste
Management: A Life Cycle Inventory, Blackwell Science, UK, 2001.
2. Fulford, D. Running A Biogas Programme: A Handbook, Intermediate Technology
Publications, UK, 1998.
3. David M. Mousdale, Introduction to Biofuels, CRC Press, 2010
4. Nijaguna B T, Biogas Technology, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
5. Frank Stephan, “Biogas Technology”, Fachhochschule Koln Hochschule, Bremerhaven,
Germany, 1985.
WEB RESOURCES:
• http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103107125/26
161
ME18010 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
(COMMON TO ME & AE) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To expose the students to the basics of CFD and the procedures.
• To acquire knowledge of finite difference and finite volume methods
• To acquire the ability to solve the problems using finite volume method
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND GOVERNING EQUATIONS 9
Introduction - Impact and applications of CFD in diverse fields - Governing equations of fluid
dynamics – Continuity - Momentum and energy - Generic integral form for governing equations
- Initial and Boundary conditions - Governing equations for boundary layers -Classification of
partial differential equations – Hyperbolic - Parabolic - Elliptic and Mixed types - Applications
and relevance.
UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 9
Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and
second order accuracy – solution methods for finite difference equations – Elliptic equations –
Iterative solution Methods – Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes.
UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD (FVM) FOR CONDUCTION 9
Finite volume formulation for steady state one and two -dimensional diffusion problems. One
dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit, Crank – Nicolson and fully implicit
schemes.
UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION 9
Steady one-dimensional convection– Central, upwind differencing schemes-properties of
discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law,
QUICK Schemes.
UNIT V CALCULATION FLOW FIELD BY FVM 9
Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid –
Momentum equations – Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation,
SIMPLE algorithm and its variants. Turbulence models, mixing length model, two equation (k-
Є) models.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will establish the mathematical representation of the governing equations of
fluid flow and heat transfer.
• The students will choose and apply explicit, implicit and semi-implicit methods of finite
differencing based on applications
• The students will deduce the suitable governing equations to formulate numerical
solutions for conduction problems using finite volume method
• The students will prioritize different schemes used for convection problems using finite
volume methods
162
• The student will appraise the knowledge of CFD techniques, basic aspects of
discretization and grid generation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jiyan Tu, Guan Heng Yeoh, Chaoqun Liu, “Computational Fluid Dynamics : A Practical
Approach”, Second edition, Elsevier Ltd, 2018.
2. MuralidharK and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”,
Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Versteeg H.K, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, The Finite Volume
Method”, Pearson Publication, Second edition, 2008.
REFERENCES :
1. Anderson. J.D, “Computational Fluid Dynamics- The Basic with Applications”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2004
2. Hoffman K.A, “Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineering”, Engineering Education
System, Austin, Texas 1989.
3. Chung T.J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press,2003.
4. Sreenivas Jeyanthi, “Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineers and Scientists”,
Springer, 2018.
WEB RESOURCES:
• https://www.mie.utoronto.ca/
163
ME 18012 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS L T P C
(COMMON TO ME, AE, CE & CH) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To acquire knowledge about Design of experiments
• Understand various aspects of DoE
• Design experiments based on problem description
• Offer optimized solution for a given problem
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTATION 7

Role of experimentation in rapid scientific progress, Historical perspective of experimental
approaches, Steps in experimentation, Principles of experimentation.
UNIT II COMPARATIVE EXPERIMENTS 9
Basic concepts of probability and statistics, Comparison of two means and two variances,
Comparison of multiple (more than two) means & ANOVA
UNIT III EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN 11
Factorial designs, fractional factorial designs, orthogonal arrays, standard orthogonal arrays &
interaction tables, modifying the orthogonal arrays, selection of suitable orthogonal array design,
analysis of experimental data
UNIT IV RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY 9
Concept, linear model, steepest ascent, second order model, regression, optimization
UNIT V TAGUCHI TECHNIQUE 9
Taguchi’s Parameter Design: Concept of robustness, noise factors, objective function & S/N
ratios, inner-array and outer-array design, data analysis
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will be able to understand the fundamental principles of Classical Design of
Experiments.
• Students will be able to analyze variance of data.
• Students will be able to apply Factorial Design principles for analyzing process
parameters
• Students will have the ability to apply Response Surface Method to evaluate and optimize
process parameters
• Students will be able to gain knowledge on Taguchi’s approach to experimental design
for attaining robustness
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Montgomery DC, Design and Analysis of Experiments, 7thEdition, John Wiley & Sons,
NY, 2008.
2. Krishnaiah K, Shahabudeen P, Applied design of experiments and Taguchi method,
Second edition, PHI,2012
164
REFERENCES :
1. Daniel Coleman, Belt Gunter , A DOE, Handbook, Createsapce publisher, 2013.

2. Ross PJ, Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
NY, 2008.
WEB RESOURCES
165
ME 18014 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To learn a basic concepts of NC, CNC machines and adaptive control system
• To study the different Mechatronics and Mechanical elements in CNC machines.
• To learn different CNC measuring system and tooling.
• To practice CNC programming
• To study the maintenance of different CNC machine elements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF NC, CNC, DNC AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL 6

Classification of machine tools – types, functions and processes - fundamentals of NC and CNC
technologies Adaptive control - types, application and benefits - general configuration of
adaptive control and function – reasons for process change -practical problems with adaptive
control - example for feedback and adaptive control.
UNIT II MECHATRONIC ELEMENTS IN CNC MACHINE TOOLS 10
CNC systems - configuration of the CNC system – interfacing – monitoring – diagnostics
machine data - compensations for machine accuracies - PLC in CNC – PLC programming for
CNC, steps in programming and case studies - machine structure -types of loads on CNC
machine - guide ways and types - mechanical transmission elements - elements for rotary motion
to linear motion - ball screw and types -roller screw and types -rack and pinion - various torque
transmission elements -requirements of feed drives and spindle drive.
UNIT III MECHATRONICS ELEMENT IN CNC MEASURING SYSTEM AND 10
TOOLING
Measuring systems - feedback devices - velocity feedback -analog and digital - position feedback
- rotary and linear. Tooling - requirement and planning -preset, qualified and semi qualified
tools. Fixtures – requirement - unified and modular fixtures -tool identification - touch trigger
probe- tool coding -EEPROM tools. 19 Tool condition monitoring - various indirect and direct
methods. Identification and gauging of work piece. Tool locking system -ball lock mechanism
and contact pressure monitoring. Automatic tool changing system - types and benefits -tool
magazine
UNIT IV CNC PROGRAMMING 14
Machine axes identification - primary, secondary and tertiary -manual CNC programming -
Milling programming fundamentals -compensation and offset in milling -fixed cycles in milling -
repetitive programming - loops, sub programs and macros. Turning programming fundamentals -
compensation and offset in turning -fixed cycles in turning. Computer assisted programming in
APT - basic geometry definition -cutter motion definition -postprocessor statements -generation
and execution of APT programs.
UNIT V TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC MACHINES 5
Verification of technical specification and functional aspects, Verification during idle running &
machine tool and the work piece accuracy -Installation of CNC machines -Maintenance of CNC
machines - machine elements – hydraulic elements -electrical and electronic elements –
maintenance schedules.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will learn basic concepts of NC, CNC machines and adaptive control system.
2. The students can expose to different Mechatronics and Mechanical elements in CNC
166
machines.
3. The students will study different CNC measuring system and tooling.
4. The students will be able to practice various CNC programming
5. The students will be able to study the maintenance of different CNC machine elements.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Groover, M.P., “Automation, Production System and CIM”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, 2003.
2. HMT Limited, “Mechatronics”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 2008.
3. Jonathan Lin S.C., “Computer Numerical Control (From Programming to Networking)”,
Delmar Publishers Inc., 2000.
4. Radhakrishnan P., “CNC Machine”, New Central Book Agency, 2000.
REFERENCES :
1. Grahamt.Smith, “Advanced Machining: The Handbook of Cutting Technology”, IFS
Publications Ltd., 1989
2. HMT Limited, “Mechatronics”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 2008.
3. Jayakumar,V., and Mahendran,B., “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Lakshmi
Publications, 2013.
4. Radhakrishnan,P., “CNC Machine”, New Central Book Agency, 2000.
5. Sehrawatt,M.S., and Narang,J.S., “CNC Machine”, DhanpatRai And Co, 2002.
6. Stenerson and Curran, “Computer Numerical Control-Operation and Programming”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2008 .
WEB RESOURCES:
5. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/digital-manufacturing-design-technology
6. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-to-computer-numerical-control
7. https://www.cnccookbook.com/online-cnc-training-courses-guides-help/
167
ME 18016 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the fundamental economic concepts applicable to engineering
• To learn the various interest formulae and their applications in real time situations
• To compare the mutually exclusive alternatives and select the feasible one that will yield
more revenue and involves less cost.
• To Decide the replacement policy that determines the optimal replacement age of equipment,
instead of using with higher maintenance costs for long time
• Learn the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision making,
comparing the total expected cost of each option with its total expected benefits and to learn
the various types of depreciation
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9
Introduction to Economics – Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Factors affecting
the law of demand and supply, Elasticity of demand and supply, Concept of Engineering
Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics –
Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break Even
Analysis – Profit/Volume ratio, Elementary economic Analysis: Material selection for a product,
Design selection for a product, Process planning.
UNIT II TIME VALUE OF MONEY 9
Interest formulae and their applications – Single payment compound amount – Single payment
present worth amount – Equal payment series compound amount – Equal payment series sinking
fund – Equal payment series Present worth amount – Equal payment series capital recovery
amount – Arithmetic Gradient series relating to its present worth, future worth and annual worth,
Geometric gradient series relating to annual equivalent amount, present worth amount and future
worth amount – Nominal and Effective interest rate.
UNIT III COMPARISON OF ALTERNATIVES 9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – Present Worth Method (Revenue-dominated cash flow
diagram, Cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Future Worth Method (Revenue-dominated cash
flow diagram, cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Annual Equivalent Method (Revenue-
dominated cash flow diagram, cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Rate of Return Method.
UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9
Introduction – Types of maintenance – Types of replacement problem – Determination of
economic life of an asset – Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with
return, concept of challenger and defender – Simple probabilistic model for items which fail
completely.
UNIT V DEPRECIATION, INFLATION AND BENEFIT COST ANALYSIS 9
Introduction – Methods of depreciation – Straight line method, declining balance method, Sum of
the years digits method, sinking fund method /Annuity method, service output method –
Evaluation of public alternatives – introduction, Examples. Inflation adjusted decisions –
procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of
economic life of asset.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
168
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will understand the concepts of economics and apply the economic principles in
material selection, process planning activities and in design selection of a product.
2. Given a problem statement, the student will draw the cash flow diagram and will relate
the examples of the time value of money in respect to real time economic problems
3. The students will solve economic problems in the selection of project alternatives by
using variety of analytical techniques including present worth analysis, Future worth
analysis, Annual worth analysis, rate of return analysis
4. Students will decide the best policy to adopt with regard to replacement of an equipment
that degrade gradually and for the components that fail suddenly.
5. Students will apply the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision
making, evaluate the public sector projects and learn about the different depreciation
methods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,
2013.
2. Zahid A khan, Arshad Noor Siddiquee and B Rajesh Kumar "Engineering Economy",
Dorling Kindersley, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan,
New York, 2011.
4. Patra K K and Dhiraj Bhattacharjee, “Engineering Economics and Costing”, S. Chand &
Company, 2013.
5. A Ramachandra Aryasri & V V Ramana Murthy, “Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting”, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2015.
WEB RESOURCES
2. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-engineering-economic-analysis-9919
169
ME18018 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To illustrate the importance of entrepreneurship as alternate career for students.
• To demonstrate the role of motivation and attitude which are required for becoming a
successful entrepreneur.
• To learn the basic skills required for establishing small enterprises or start-ups..
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur –
Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth.
UNIT II MOTIVATION 9
Motivation Theories – Motivating factors – Achievement Motivation: Achieve Motivation
Training – AMT tools: Self Rating, Business Games, Thematic Apperception Test –
Entrepreneurial competencies – Entrepreneurship Development Programs – Need, Objectives,
content, phases, evaluation.
UNIT III BUSINESS 9
Small Enterprises – Definition, Characteristics, role of small enterprises in economic
development – Project Formulation – content and formulation of a project report – Project
Appraisal – concept and methods – Ownership Structures – Market Survey and Research,
Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment – Preliminary Project Report – Start-ups.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Sources of Finance – Term Loans – Financial Institutions – working capital management –
Accounting process, journal, ledger, trial balance, profit loss account, balance sheet – Taxation
and benefits for small enterprises and start-ups.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sickness in small Business – Concept, Signal and symptoms, Causes and Consequences,
Corrective Measures – Business Incubators – Government Policy for Small Enterprises and start-
ups – Growth Strategies in small enterprises – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger
and Sub Contracting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will understand the importance of entrepreneurship and its role in economic
development.
2. Students will extend various motivation Training and Entrepreneurship Development
Program which will help in developing their character and attitude towards
entrepreneurship.
3. The Students will prepare and evaluate a business plan
4. Students familiarize about all type of financial institutions to get financial aid for starting
small business.
5. Students will be exposed to state and central government schemes that are supporting
170
small entrepreneurs and start-ups.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanka S S, "Entrepreneurial Development", S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES :
1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013.

2. Mathew J Manimala, "Entrepreneurship theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis” 2nd
Edition Dream tech, 2005.
3. Rajeev Roy, "Entrepreneurship", 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.
WEB RESOURCES:
171
AE 18602 HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C
(COMMON TO AE & ME) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the basic concept of Hybrid and Electric Vehicle.
• To understand the basic concept of energy Storage devices.
• To familiarise about electric drives and its controllers.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NEED FOR ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM 9
History of electric and hybrid vehicles. Need of electric and hybrid vehicles – comparative
study of diesel, petrol, electric and hybrid vehicles. Limitations of electric vehicles.
Specification of different electric and hybrid vehicles.
UNIT II ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES AND FUELL CELLS 9
Electromechanical batteries- types of batteries –lead acid batteries, nickel based batteries,
lithium based batteries, electrochemical reactions, thermodynamic voltage, specific energy,
specific power, energy efficiency and ultra-capacitors.
Fuel Cell- Fuel cell characteristics- Fuel cell types-Hydrogen fuel cell- Connecting cell in
series- water management in the PEM fuel cell- Thermal Management of the PEM fuel cell.
UNIT III ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Electric vehicle layout, performance of electric vehicles – traction motor characteristics,
tractive effort, transmission requirements, vehicle performance, energy consumption,
advantage and limitations, specifications, system components, electronic control system,
safety and challenges in electric vehicles.
UNIT IV HYBRID VEHICLES 9
Concepts of hybrid electric drive train, types, architecture of series and parallel hybrid
electric drive train, merits and demerits, hybrid electric drive train design, mild and full
hybrids, plug-in hybrid electric vehicles and range extended hybrid electric vehicles.
UNIT V PROPULSION MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 9
Types of electric motors – working principle of AC and DC motors. Characteristic of shunt,
series and compound type of DC motors- permanent magnet and separately exited DC
motors. AC single phase and 3-phase motor – inverters – DC and AC motor speed
controllers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Study the need and history of alternative systems for vehicle propulsion and compare
their performance with conventional vehicles.
• Discuss and compare the construction, working and performance of various energy
storage devices and fuel cells.
• Discuss and compare the architecture, performance of electric vehicles and their
safety aspects.
• Classify and discuss the different hybrid vehicle architecture and study their merits
and demerits.
• Describe the working, characteristics of propulsion motors and speed controllers.
172
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRC
Press, 2005.
2. Iqbal Husain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2003
3. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “John
Wiley & Sons, 2003.
REFERENCES :
1. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth

Heinemann Publication, 2005.
2. Lino Guzzella, “Vehicle Propulsion System”, Springer Publications, 2005.
WEB RESOURCES
173
ME 18020 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS L T P C
(COMMON TO ME & AE & MR) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To teach students the basics of robotics, construction features, sensor applications, robot
cell design, robot programming and application of artificial intelligence and expert
systems in robotics.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND DRIVE SYSTEM 9
Robot – Definition - Need for robots - Classification based on coordinate system - Control
method – Work envelope. Robot motion – Types & joints, wrist – pitch, roll, yaw. Joint notation
scheme, Payload, Robot specification. Drive system – Hydraulic – Pneumatic – Electric and its
comparision.
UNIT II END EFFECTORS AND ROBOT KINEMATICS 9
End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical grippers – Gripper mechanisms, Magnetic gripper,
Vaccum gripper – Inflatable gripper; Internal and External gripper; Gripper selection – Tool as
end effectors – Gripper force analysis. Forward and Inverse kinematics of manipulator with two
three Degrees of Freedom (DOF) in two-dimensional space – four degrees of freedom in three-
dimensional space. (Elementary treatment only)
UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 9
Transducers and Sensors – Sensor categories - Tactile array sensor – Touch -Proximity and range
sensors – Compliance sensor – Sensing wrist forces - Sensing joint forces.
Function of machine vision system – Sensing and Digitizing, Imaging devices – CCD –
Videocon camera, Lighting techniques. Image Processing and Analysis – Image data reduction –
segmentation – Feature extraction – Object recognition. Training of vision system.
UNIT IV ROBOT PROGRAMMING AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Methods of Robot Programming – Robot programming – Lead through – manual – Powered –
Textural robot languages – Robot program as a path in space – Defining position in space –
Reason for defining points – Speed control – Motion interpolation.
Artificial intelligence – Basics – Goals of artificial intelligence – AI techniques – Problem
representation and problem solving – Search techniques in problem solving.
UNIT V ROBOT CELL DESIGN, ECONOMICS AND APPLICATION 9
Robot cell layouts – Multiple robots and machine interference – Work cell design and control –
Safety in robotics. Implementation of robots in industries – various steps; Economic analysis of
robots – Pay back method – EUAC (Equivalent Uniform Annual Cost Method). Industrial
application of robots – Introduction to COBOTS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The student will be able to select an appropriate type of robot and a suitable drive system
for a given application.
2. The student will be able to choose a suitable end effector for the given application and
solve simple problems in forward and inverse kinematics
3. The student will be able to select suitable sensor, right lighting technique and suitable
image processing technique for the given application.
4. The student will be able to select a suitable programming method; he will be able to
174
understand various search techniques for problem solving.
5. The student will be able to select appropriate robot cell layout, understand work cell
design and safety in robotics; also, he will be able to perform economic analysis
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Groover, M.P., Weis, M., Nagel, R.N. and Odrey, N.G., “Industrial Robotics Technology,
Programming and Applications”, Mc Graw-Hill, Int., 1986.
REFERENCES :
1. Deb, S.R.” Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 1994.
2. Jordanides,T. and Torby,B.J., ,”Expert Systems and Robotics “, Springer –Verlag, New
York, May 1991.
3. K.S.Fu, Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee, C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 1987.
4. Klafter, R.D., Chmielewski, T.A. and Negin, M., “Robotics Engineering – An Integrated
Approach”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1984.
5. Koren, Y., “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
6. Kozyrey, Yu. “Industrial Robots”, MIR Publishers Moscow, 1985.
WEB RESOURCES
175
ME18022 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY, MAINTENANCE AND ETHICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart the knowledge on safety rules in industry and protection of machines.
• To familiarize standards, regulations and testing methods in engineering problems in
machine and accessories
• To endow about the planning for maintenance practices.
• To provide the knowledge on preventive maintenance and condition monitoring.
• To bring into the light of the ethical principles in engineering industry
UNIT I INDUSTRIAL SAFETY & PRINCIPLES OF MACHINE GUARDING 10
General safety rules, principles, maintenance, Inspections different types of machines, safety
principles, electrical guards, work area, material handling, inspection, standards and codes- saws,
types, hazards. Guarding during maintenance, Zero Mechanical State (ZMS), Definition, Policy
for ZMS – guarding of hazards - point of operation protective devices, machine guarding, types,
fixed guard, interlock guard, automatic guard, trip guard, electron eye, positional control guard,
fixed guard fencing- guard construction- guard opening Selection and suitability.
UNIT II SAFETY IN FINISHING, INSPECTION AND TESTING 9
Heat treatment operations, electro plating, paint shops, sand and shot blasting, safety in
inspection and testing, dynamic balancing, hydro testing, valves, boiler drums and headers,
pressure vessels, air leak test, steam testing, safety in radiography, personal monitoring devices,
radiation hazards, engineering and administrative controls, Indian Boilers Regulation.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9
Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance
activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine
availability – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance economics
UNIT IV PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, CONDITION BASED 9
MONITORING
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,
maintenance schedules - TPM. Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM –
On-load testing and offload testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive
tapes – Pistol thermometers.
UNIT V ENGINEERING ETHICS 8
Senses of “Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy –
Models of professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion
– Uses of Ethical Theories.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Illustrate the rules and principles in safety and maintenance in machines and material
handling systems.
2. Make use of different testing, monitoring and inspection methods in various mechanical
176
operations and devices
3. Familiarize the economical maintenance activity plan and reliability of the systems.
4. Utilize the condition monitoring techniques to develop preventive schedules and monitoring.
5. Explore and assess the sense of ethics to strengthen their moral values in their profession and
personal life.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya S.N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., 1995.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, 2nd edition
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, 4th edition Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Srivastava S.K.,“Industrial Maintenance Management”,- S. Chand and Co., 1998.
5. Venkataraman .K “Maintancence Engineering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt.
Ltd., 2007.
REFERENCES :
1. Armstrong, “Condition Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 1988. 5th edition. Davies, “Handbook of
Condition Monitoring”, Chapman & Hall, 1998.
2. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004
3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
4. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand& Co., 2010.
5. Grimaldi ,John V and Rollin, H. Simonds, “Safety Management”, All India Travelers
Book seller, New Delhi, 1989.
6. ‘Health and Safety in welding and Allied processes”, Welding Institute UK, High Tech.
Publishing Ltd., London, 1989.
7. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2003.
8. Krishnan N.V “Safety in Industry” Jaico Publishers House, 1996.
9. White E.N., “Maintenance Planning”, I Documentation, 2 nd edition, Gower Press, 1988.
HAND BOOKS:
1. “Accident Prevention Manual”, NSC, Chicago, 1982.
2. Higgins L.R., “Maintenance Engineering Hand book”, McGraw Hill, 7th Edition, 2008.
3. “Indian Boiler acts and Regulations”, IBR codes, Government of India
4. “Occupational safety Manual”, BHEL Trichy, 1988.
WEB RESOURCES
177
1. https://www.osha.gov
2. https://www.iti.com › safety
3. https://www.iti.com › maintenance
178
ME 18024 MICRO CONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• By the end of the course students will become thoroughly familiar with the elements of
microcontroller software, hardware, types of machine tools, their specifications and
operations performed.
• To provide the overview of embedded system design principles
• To understand the concepts of real time operating systems
• To impart the knowledge on networking.
UNIT I MICRO CONTROLLER 9

8051 Hardware Architecture, pin diagram – Functional Building Blocks of Processor –
Memory organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Comparing Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers - Serial Communication – Interrupts-Introduction to Arduino.
UNIT II MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9
Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control Algorithms& I/O instructions – Simple programming
exercises-key board and display interface – Closed loop control of servo motor- stepper motor
control – Washing Machine Control.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
Overview of embedded systems, embedded system design process, challenges - common
design metrics and optimizing them. Hardware - Software codesign embedded product
development.
UNIT IV REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM 9
Real time operating systems Architecture - Tasks and Task states - Tasks and Data -
Semaphore and shared data - Message queues, mail boxes and pipes - Encapsulating
semaphores and queues - interrupt routines in an RTOS Environment. Introduction to Vx
works, RT Linux.
UNIT V PIC MICROCONTROLLER AND NETWORKING 9
PIC Architecture - Instruction set - Addressing modes - Timers - Interrupt logic - CCP
modules – ADC. Networking: Introduction - CAN BUS - I2C - GSM - GPRS - Zig bee.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will distinguish the feature of the 8085 microprocessor, Hardware
Architecture and PIN diagram. The students will be able to explain the construction
details and will prepare the operation planning sheet for a given part diagram
2. Students will illustrate the architecture and programming of Microcontroller 8051.
3. Students will determine the need of embedded systems and their development
procedures and summaries the concepts involved in Real time operating systems.
4. Students will apply the various tools for developing the embedded applications.
5. Students will be familiar in construction, addressing modes and instructions sets of PIC
micro controller.
179
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller
and Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
REFERENCES :
1. Frank Vahid, Tony John Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/
Software Introduction - Wiley and Sons, Inc.2012.
2. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded System – Architecture, Programming, Design’, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2011.
3. R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with
8085, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
4. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture,
Programming & Interfacing using 8085,8086,8051, McGraw Hill Edu,2013.
5. Valder – Perez, “Microcontroller – Fundamentals and Applications with Pic,” Yees dee
Publishers, Taylor & Francis, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:
180
ME 18026 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
(COMMON TO ME, AE & CH) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited
resources for the engineering and business problems.
• To apply the concept of inventory and project management.
• To judge the suitable decision models and queuing theory for Industrial problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 10
Phases of OR – Linear programming Formulation- Graphical Solution and Simplex Method –
IPPs - Definition – Types Formulation – Branch and Bound Technique (2 – Variable problems
only)
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND SEQUENCING MODELS 9
Transpo Transportation model – Initial solution by North West corner method – Least Cost method –
VAM. Optimality test – MODI method. Assignment model – formulation – Balanced and
unbalanced assignment problems. Sequencing – Problem with N jobs and 2 machines - 3
machines and ‘M’ machines.
UNIT III PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INVENTORY 8
CPM and PERT networks – Critical path scheduling – Inventory models – Economic order
quantity models – Quantity discount models – Stochastic inventory models – Multi product
models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUING THEORY AND NON-LINEAR MODEL 9
Queuing models - Queuing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and
multi-server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite
population – Simulation Introduction - Lagrangian Method - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 9
Decision models – Game theory – Two-person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution. Replacement models – Items that deteriorate with time -
When money value changes – Items that fail completely – Individual replacement and Group
replacement.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• The students will identify, develop and evaluate LP models to achieve the best solution
for industrial scenarios.
• The students will select suitable methodology for analyzing the network problems
• The students will select the suitable methodology for real time problems in inventory and
sequencing
• The students will apply suitable technique for queuing problem
• The students will evaluate a situation and suggest suitable decisions
181
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneerselvan. R., “Operation Research”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2016
2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Tenth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2016
REFERENCES :
1. Rama Murthy R, “Operations Research”,Second edition, New Age International Publisher,

2007
2. Hira and Gupta “Problems in Operations Research”, S.Chand and Co.2008
3. Wagner, “Operations Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2000.
WEB RESOURCES:
182
ME 18028 NANOMATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To learn the fundamentals of nanoscience, units, scaling, bonds, interactions, structure size
and dependence
• To learn about various methods of nanomaterial processing
• To learn the various techniques available to characterize nanomaterials
• To understand the various applications of nanomaterials
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Introduction, Scientific revolution historical development of nanomaterials, Classification,
Definition of nano system – bottom up and top down approaches; Units, Scaling, Atoms,
Molecules, Clusters and Supramolecules. Structure and Bonding – Chemical bonds,
Intermolecular forces, Special interactions, Hydrogen bonding, Hydrophobic and Hydrophilic
interactions.
UNIT II STRUCTURE, PROPERTIES AND SIZE DEPENDENCE 9
Molecular and crystalline structures, Hierarchical structures, Bulk to surface transition, Surface
reconstruction, Properties – chemical, optical, vibrational, thermal mechanical, Density function
theory.
UNIT III NANO MATERIAL PROCESSING 9
Chemical methods - Electrochemical methods, Vapour growth; Thin film methods – CVD &
PVD, sputtering, laser ablation; Mechanical methods – ball milling, mechanical attrition; Sol-gel
methods, bio-inspired processing
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Need for characterization, SEM, TEM, Scanning Probe Microscopy – Atomic force, Scanning
tunneling methods; Diffraction and scattering techniques, Vibrational spectroscopy, Surface
techniques.
UNIT V NANOMATERIALS APPLICATION 9
Nano-electronics, Nano optics, Nano sensors, Nano bio medical applications, Photovoltaic cells,
fuel cells, batteries and energy related applications, Nano composites for engineering
applications, nanolithography.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to outline the evolution and structure of nanomaterials
2. Students will be able to understand various properties and size dependency in
nanomaterials.
3. Students will be able to explain various processing techniques to prepare nanomaterials
4. Students will be able to explain various characterization techniques
5. Students will be able to summarize applications of nanomaterials in various fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank J. Owens and Charles P. Poole Jr., “The Physics and Chemistry of NanoSolids”,
183
Wiley-Inderscience, 2008.
2. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials-Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, London, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. G. Ozin and A.Arsenault, “Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, “,

RSC Publishing, 2005.
2. Edward L. Wolf, “Nanophysics and Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Modern
Concepts in Nanoscience”, Wiley-VCH, 2005.
WEB RESOURCES:
184
ME18030 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To study the basic concepts of product design and development process.
• To develop different models and designs of products as per customer needs.
• To enable the students to create products with desired qualities and characteristics.
UNIT I PRODUCT PLANNING 9
Product Planning Process- Identify Opportunities- Evaluating and Prioritizing Projects-
Allocating Resources and Timing- Pre-Project Planning-Reflect on the Results and the Process-
Identifying Customer Needs- Raw Data from Customers-Interpreting Raw Data in Terms of
Customer Needs-Organizing the Needs into a Hierarchy- Establishing the Relative Importance of
the Needs-Case study.
UNIT II PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 9
Specifications Established- Establishing Target Specifications–QFD-Setting the Final
Specifications-Concept Generation-The Activity of Concept Generation- Clarify the Problem-
Search Externally-Search Internally-Explore Systematically- Case study.
UNIT III CONCEPT SELECTION 9
Concept Selection-Overview of Methodology- The Decision matrix – Pugh’s method - Concept
Screening-Concept Testing-Define the Purpose of the Concept Test- Choose a Survey
Population-Choose a Survey Format- Communicate the Concept- Measure Customer Response-
Interpret the Results- Concept Testing Methodologies- Case study.
UNIT IV PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9
Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering - geometric layout
development - Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level design issues - secondary
systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio Architecture.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING, ASSEMBLY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Factors influencing process selection- fabrication guidelines- design for manufacturing- design
for assembly- Reliability and failure- risk assessment- preliminary hazard analysis- failure
modes- effects analysis- Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and
assembly costs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will explain the concept of product design and its applications.
• The students will classify the product planning process based on the customer need.
• The students will identify the best concept based on concept evaluation process
• The students will establish the final specification of the product with cost, aesthetic
and ergonomics aspects.
• The students will implement the suitable product architecture in real time
applications.
185
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ulrich, Karl T. and Steven D. Eppinger, ‘”Product Design and Development”,
Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 6th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. David G.Ullman, “The Mechanical Design Process”, Tata McGraw Hill , 2015.
2. Kevin Otto, and Kristin Wood, “Product Design – Techniques in Reverse Engineering
and New Product Development”, Pearson Education, First edition,2000, ISBN 81- 7758-
821-4.
3. Orwin, Homewood, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Stephen Rosenthal,
Business One 1992, ISBN, 1-55623-603-4
4. Stuart Pugh, “Tool Design – Integrated Methods for successful Product Engineering”,
Addison Wesley Publishing, Newyork, NY, 1991, ISBN 0-202-41639-5.
WEB RESOURCES:
186
ME 18032 SENSORS FOR AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the various types of sensors, transducers and signal conditioning circuits
essential for industrial automation
• To explore the different industrial applications of smart sensors
• To describe the recent advances in sensor technology
• To impart knowledge on chemical and radiation sensors
Definition, Measurement Techniques, Classification of errors, Error analysis, Static and dynamic
characteristics of transducers, Performance measures of sensors, Classification of sensors,
calibration techniques.
UNIT II RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE 9
TRANSDUCERS
Potentiometer, strain gauges, optical encoders, LVDT, RVDT, Synchro, Microsyn, Applications:
Pressure, position, angle and acceleration. Capacitance circuitry, Feedback type condenser
microphone , frequency modulating oscillator circuit, Dynamic capacitance variation, A.C.
Bridge for Amplitude Modulation, Applications: Proximity, microphone, pressure, displacement
UNIT III PIEZOELECTRIC & MAGNETIC SENSORS 9
Piezoelectric Materials and properties, Modes of deformation, Multimorphs, Environmental
effects, Applications: Accelerometer, ultrasonic. Magnetic Sensors, types, principle, requirement
and advantages: Magneto resistive, Hall Effect – Eddy current.
UNIT IV RADIATION AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL SENSORS 9
Photo conductive cell, photo voltaic, Photo resistive, Fiber optic sensors, Ray and Nuclear
radiation sensors, Electro chemical sensors: Electro chemical cell, Polarization, sensor
Electrodes and Electro-ceramics in Gas Media
UNIT V MODERN SENSORS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Film sensors, micro-scale sensors, Particle measuring systems, Vibration Sensors, SMART
sensors, Machine Vision, Multi-sensor systems
Case studies of Sensors in Automobile Engineering, Aeronautics, Machine tools and
Manufacturing processes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will describe the principles of motion, proximity and ranging sensors and
able to determine the characteristics of it.
2. The students will classify the principles of force, magnetic and heading sensors and able
to determine the characteristics of it.
3. The students will illustrate the working principles of optical, pressure and temperature
sensors and able to study the characteristics of it.
4. The students will choose the required signal conditioning units for building the
transducers
187
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Renganathan S.,” Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd., 2003.
REFERENCES :
1. Bolton W, “Mechatronics”, Thomson Press, 2019.

2. Bradley D.A., and Dawson, Burd and Loader, “Mechatronics”, Thomson Press India
Ltd”, 2004.
3. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurement systems Application and Design”, International
Student Edition, VII Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Company, 2019.
4. Ghosh A K, “Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation”, Fourth Edition, PHI
Learning, 2012
5. Patranabis D., “Sensor and Actuators”, Prentice Hall of India (Pvt) Ltd., 2005.
WEB RESOURCES:
188
ME18034 THERMAL TURBO MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To teach the various system, principles, operations and applications of different types of
turbo machinery component.
• To understand the design parameters and flow analysis of centrifugal fans and blowers
• To analyze the performance of centrifugal compressors and axial flow compressors
• To be familiar with the performance of axial and radial flow turbines
UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9
Energy transfer between fluid and rotor- Classification of fluid machinery, dimensionless
parameters- specified speed – applications- stage velocity triangles- work and efficiency
UNIT II CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9
Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeller blades-volute and diffusers, losses,
characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise
UNIT III CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSORS 9
Construction details, impeller flow losses, slip factor, diffuser analysis, losses and performance
curves
UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS 9
Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, stage losses and deficiency, work done
simple design problems and performance characteristics
UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, losses and coefficients, blade design principles, testing and
performance characteristics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Student will be able to describe the basic principles applied in fluid machinery.
2. Students can analyze the characteristics of centrifugal fans, blowers and compressors.
3. Students will determine the performance of Centrifugal Compressors.
4. Students can analyze the performance of axial flow compressors.
5. Students can evaluate the performance of axial and radial flow turbines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dixon S.L, “Fluid Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Turbo machines”, Elsevier (2005).
2. Kadambi. V and Manohar Prasad, “An Introduction to Energy Conversion”, Volume III
Turbo machinery, New International Publishes reprint (2008).
3. Yahya S.M “Turbines, Compressors & Fans”, Tata-McGraw Hill Co., 4TH
Edition.(2010).
REFERENCES:
1. Bruneck, “Fans”, Pergamons Press, 1973.

2. Gopalakrishnan G and PriviRaj D,”A Treatise on Turbomachines”,,Scitec Publications
(India) Pvt.Ltd.2002
189
3. Ganesan.V.”Gas turbines”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Pub Co.,1999
4. Shepherd.D.G, “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Macmillan, 1969.
WEB RESOURCES:
190
GE 18052 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and processes.
• To learn TQM & process monitoring techniques
• To know about various quality management system implemented in industries
Fundamentals of TQM – Historical developments – important philosophies- (Deming, Juran,
Crossby, Ishikawa) and their impact of quality – Quality planning, Quality statement – Quality
policy.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Customer focus - Customer satisfaction – customer perception of quality, customer complaints,
Employee involvement – Empowerment and Team work- Recognition and Reward –
Performance appraisal - Supplier Quality Management – Supplier Rating – Supplier rating by
Analytical Hierarchical Process (AHP)
UNIT III PROCESS MONITORING 9
Seven tools of quality, New Seven management tools, Statistical fundamentals – Normal curve
charts for variables and attributes, TPM – Concepts, Process Capability analysis , PDSA cycle,
5S, Kaizen.
UNIT IV TQM TECHNIQUES 10
Quality Functions Deployment (QFD) – house of Quality, QFD process and benefits,
Benchmarking process, Taguchi Quality Loss function, FMEA – concept, Industrial case
studies on DFMEA and PFMEA – Six Sigma –concepts- Methodologies
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9
Need for ISO – ISO 9001: 2015 – Elements, Implementation, Documentation and Auditing, QS
9000 / TS 16949 - ISO14000 and OSHAS 18000 – Concept requirements and benefits – Case
studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course,
1. Students will be able to describe the evolution and concepts of quality and Quality
Management.
2. Students will be able to Practice the Principles of TQM in work environment
3. With industrial examples, student will be able to illustrate the process monitoring tools
4. Students will apply the quality techniques of TQM in industries.
5. With appropriate case studies, students will deploy the need of Quality Management
systems in industries.
191
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dale H. Besterfiled, et at., "Total quality Management", Third Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, Indian Reprint, 2006.
2. Poornima M. Charantimath, Total Quality Management, Pearson education, 3rd edition,
2017
REFERENCES :
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 8th
Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice
Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Shridhara Bhat, “TQM Text and Cases”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2002.
4. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2006.
WEB RESOURCES:
192
OPEN ELECTIVE – I
(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Odd Semester)
OE18001 BASICS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge of general principles of Mechanical Engineering.
• To enable the students to distinguish the components and working principle of Power
plants, IC engines and Refrigeration system.
• To explain the basic materials and various manufacturing Processes.
• To understand the fundamentals of fluid power system.
UNIT I POWER PLANTS 9
Renewable and Non-Renewable sources of energy, Working principle of power plants – Steam,
Nuclear and Hydro-Electric. High pressure boilers, Turbines – Reaction and Impulse turbines,
Reciprocating Pumps – single acting and double acting, Centrifugal Pumps.
UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 7
Refrigeration – Application of refrigeration, Vapour compression refrigeration system, Vapour
absorption refrigeration system, Construction and working principle of domestic refrigerators.
Air conditioning principles and system – Scope of air conditioning – Psychometric properties of
air – Human comforts and its standards, Working principle of window and split type air
conditioner.
UNIT III INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 10
Otto cycle – Diesel cycle – Working principle of 2-stroke and 4-stroke engine, Introduction to
automobiles – Types and layout of automobiles – Major components and its functions,
Fundamentals of aerodynamic: Theory of lift and drag, Principle of rocket propulsion, Aircraft
engine and its types. Hybrid Electric vehicle.
UNIT IV MATERIALS, MACHINE TOOL AND MANUFACTURING 10
PROCESSES
Engineering materials: Classification – Properties – Alloys and their application.
Working principle and types of operations – Lathe, Drilling, Grinding and Milling machines.
Introduction to NC and CNC machines.
Metal forming Process – Casting, Sheet metal forming, Sheet metal cutting, Forging, Rolling,
Extrusion, Metal joining process – Soldiering, Brazing, and Welding.
UNIT V FLUID POWER SYSTEM 9
Hydraulic system: Pump classifications, Cylinders - Types and construction, Control values –
Flow, Direction and Pressure. Pneumatic system: Compressor - Filter, Regulator, Lubricator
and Air control valves. Introduction to PLC and its application.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will be able to acquire the knowledge on functioning and benefits of power
plants and its components.
2. The students will be able to understand the working principles of refrigerators and air
conditioners.
3. The students will interpret the working principles of internal combustion engines; Hybrid
Electric Vehicles.
4. The students will be able to understand the Engineering materials - Different Machining
193
operations and forming processes.
5. The students will be able to interpret the Fluid power system and its components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy M.S, "Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering", Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2018.
2. Kumar, T., Leenus Jesu Martin and Murali, G., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Suma
3. Prabhu, T. J., Jai Ganesh, V. and Jebaraj, S., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Scitech
REFERENCES :
1. Nag P.K, "Power Plant Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,
2014.
2. Ganesan V, "Internal Combustion Engines", 4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co., New Delhi, 2012.
3. Arora C.P, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co,
New Delhi, 2009.
4. Anthony Esposito,” Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005
5. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury. AK. "Elements of workshop
Technology", volume I and II, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai,
16th edition, 2015.
6. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education India
7th Edition, 2014.
7. R. Srinivasan, "Engineering Materials and Metallurgy", McGraw Hill Education, 2009
194
OE18003 ELEMENTS OF MECHANICAL COMPONENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basic concepts of machine components in mechanical systems.
2. To familiarize with various steps involved in the Design Process.
3. To impart knowledge on the principles, design and operation of hydraulic and pneumatic
components in mechanical systems
4. To impart knowledge about the elements and its working principles involved in
Mechatronics systems.
UNIT I MECHANICAL COMPONENTS 9
Introduction to various mechanical components, selection of materials – Mechanical
Characteristics of Materials -design creteria-Factor of safety-Theory of Failure . Couplings,
shafts, spring.
UNIT II TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS 9
Design of Flat belt drive - V-belt drive – chain drive-Gears-Types-terminology- Speed ratios -
number of teeth - Gear materials - Spur Gears –Gear train.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS 9
Sources of Hydraulic power: Pumping Theory – Pump Classification- pumps, Hydraulic
Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Hydraulic motors Control Components, Pressure
control valves- Types, Construction and Operation- Applications.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC COMPONENTS 9
Importance of Pneumatic system, Compressors- Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems.
UNIT V MAHINE TOOLS 9
Machine tool -lathe, milling machine, drilling machine Components – linear and reciprocation
motion generation- components.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will be able to identify the different mechanical components based on its
design considerations.
2. The students will be able to understand and select the required belt and gear transmission
for its desired applications.
3. The students will be able to understand the concept of hydraulic power source; Hydraulic
Actuators; Control Valves.
4. The students will be able to understand the concept of Pneumatic power source;
Pneumatic Actuators; Control Valves; Servo Systems.
5. The students will be able to understand the different Machining operations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co,
2016.
195
4. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
REFERENCES :
1. Michael B. Histand and Davis G.Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill International 3rd edition, 2007.
2. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design,
Wiley, 2013
3. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publication,
Chennai, 2003.
4. Sen G C and A. Bhattacharya.A, “Principles of Machine Tools”, New Central book
Agency, 2010.
5. Srinivasan. R, "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control", IInd Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill
Education, 2012.
WEB RESOURCE:
196
OE18005 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To know the basics Concepts of Industrial Engineering
• To understand about Work Study, Method Study and Time Study.
• To understand the concept of Motion Study.
• To recognize the need for Ergonomics and Ergonomics Model.
UNIT I INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING & PRODUCTIVITY 9
Meaning, Definition, Objective, Need, Scope, Evolution and developments. Definition of
productivity, individual enterprises, management productivity of materials, land, building, machine
and power. Measurement of productivity, factors affecting the productivity, productivity
improvement programs, wages and incentives (simple numerical problems).
UNIT II WORK STUDY, METHOD STUDY & MICRO AND MEMO MOTION 10
STUDY
Definition, objective and scope of work study. Human factors in work study. Work study and
management, work study and supervision, work study and worker. Method study – Definition,
objective & scope, activity recording and exam aids. Charts to record moments in shop operation –
process charts, flow process charts, travel chart and multiple activity charts. (With simple
problems). Charts to record moment at work place – principles of motion economy, classification of
moments two handed process chart, SIMO chart, and micro motion study. Development, definition
and installation of the improved method, brief concept about synthetic motion studies.
UNIT III WORK MEASUREMENT & TIME STUDY 9
Definition, objective and benefit of work measurement. Work measurement techniques. Work
sampling: need, confidence levels, sample size determinations, random observation, conducting
study with the simple problems. Time Study, Definition, time study equipment, selection of job,
steps in time study. Breaking jobs into elements, recording information. Rating & standard Rating,
standard performance, scale of rating, factors of affecting rate of working, allowances and standard
time determination. Predetermined motion time study – Method time measurement (MTM)
UNIT IV ERGONOMICS & DESIGN OF MAN-MACHINE SYSTEM 10
Introduction, areas of study under ergonomics, system approach to ergonomics model, man-machine
system. Components of man-machine system and their functions – work capabilities of industrial
worker, study of development of stress in human body and their consequences. Fatigue in industrial
workers, Quantitative qualitative representation and alphanumeric displays, Controls and their
design criteria, control types, relation between controls and displays, layouts of panels and
machines. Design of work places, influence of climate on human efficiency. Influence of noise,
vibration and light
UNIT V CURRENT TRENDS 07
Introduction to Agile manufacturing, Lean and Six Sigma, Value Engineering, Just in time, Total
quality management, Enterprise resource planning, Supply chain and logistics management.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
197
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will be able to distinguish the basics of Industrial engineering concepts.
2. Students will apply work study and method study in Industrial case studies
3. Students will demonstrate the work sampling method and time study in a manufacturing
process
4. Students will be able to construct ergonomical models for industrial application
5. Students will be able to examine the industrial process by applying different techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
• George Kanawaty, “Introduction to Work Study”, IV Revised Edition,1992.
• Khanna.O.P, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai Publications Pvt Ltd,
2010
• Marvin E. Mundel and David L.Danner, Motion and Time study Improving Productivity,
Prentice Hall India,7 th Edition,1994.
• Ralph M Barnes, “Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work, 7ed (WSE)
Paperback,2009.
• “Engineered work Measurement” - Weldon, ELBS,1991
REFERENCES:
1.Bridger RS. Introduction to Ergonomics. 3 rd CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fl, USA,2009.
2. Khan, M.I, “Industrial Engineering”, New Age International, 2nd Edition, 2009
3. Sanders. S and E J McCormick, Human Factors in Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill ,New
york ,7th Edition,1993.
WEB RESOURCE:
198
OE 18007 BASICS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To get exposed to various sources of energy and the environmental impact of them.
• To acquire knowledge about various conversion techniques for effective utilization of
renewable energy resources.
• To gain knowledge about various storage devices for energy storage.
• To assess the life cycle and conduct primary and net energy analysis
UNIT I ENERGY RESOURCES 9

Energy generation in coal based, nuclear based, diesel and gas based power plants, world energy
flows, energy and economic growth, supply and availability; Electric utilities and regulations,
cost structure analysis, economics of energy use in agriculture, transport, building, Industry and
energy substitution, cost benefit analysis –carbon credit and footprint.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF ENERGY USE 8
Global warming -sources of emissions, CO2emissions, impacts, mitigation and sustainability.
environmental standards, legislation and audits, air pollution -SOx, NOx, CO, particulates, solid
and water pollution, formation of pollutants, measurement and controls.
UNIT III RENEWABLE ENERGY 10
Solar PV cell; Wind energy-HAWT; Biomass energy-Bio-digesters, Bio-diesel; OTEC.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGE 9
Potential energy, Pumped hydro storage; KE and Compressed gas system: Flywheel storage,
compressed air energy storage; Electrical and magnetic energy storage: Capacitors,
electromagnets; Chemical Energy storage: Thermo-chemical, photo-chemical, bio-chemical,
Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage (SMES) systems.
UNIT V ENERGY ECONOMICS 9
Simple payback period, time value of money, IRR, NPV, life cycle costing, cost of saved energy,
and cost of energy generated, examples from energy generation and conservation, energy chain,
primary energy analysis, life cycle assessment, net energy analysis, case studies on life cycle
costing
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• Students will be able to explain about the various traditional sources of energy.
• Students will be able to identify the environmental impact associated with usage of
traditional energy sources.
• Students will be able to identify various techniques used in effective conversion of
renewable sources of energy for our use.
• Students will be able to summarize about various storage of energy in various forms.
• Students will be able to conduct analysis on primary and net energy and be able to estimate
costs related to energy consumption and conservation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao S., Paruekar BB, Energy Technology, Khanna Publisher, 14th Reprint, 2014.
199
2. Koteswara Rao MVR, Energy Resources: Conventional and Non Conventional, BS
publishers, 1st reprint, 2011.
3. Dulasi Birundha Varadarajan, Energy Economics, Sterling Publishers, 1993.
4. Robert Huggins, Energy Storage, Springer publications, 2010.
5. Raghavan Nambiar, Text Book of Environmental Studies, SciTech Publisher, 2008
6. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCES :
1. Goldemberg, Jose, Energy for a sustainable world, Wiley-Blackwell publications,

1988.
2. Frank Barnes, Large energy storage systems, CRC press, 2011.
3. Desai AV, Energy demand – Analysis, Management and Conservation, New Age (I)
publisher, 1998.
4. Kumar HD, Energy and Natural resources: Sustainability and Management, Vitasta
Publishers, 2010.
200
OPEN ELECTIVE – II
(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Even Semester)
OE 18002 ELEMENTS OF AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To make the students understand the fundamentals and elements of automation system.
• Students should be able to determine the hardware and software requirements
• They should further understand how to design automation systems for different applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION 7
Basic elements of automation system – Advanced Automation Functions - Levels of automation
– Industrial control systems - Continuous and Discrete control systems – Computer process
control.
UNIT II HARDWARE COMPONENTS FOR AUTOMATION 10
Sensors – Accelerometer, Dynamometer, Fluid flow sensor, Limit switch, Linear encoder,
LVDT, Piezoelectric transducer – Proximity sensor, Strain gage, Temperature sensors –
Thermistor, Thermocouple.
Actuators – Types – Electric motors – Rotary & Linear motors – Hydraulic and Pneumatic
actuators – Analog-to-Digital converters – Digital-to-Analog converters, Input/output devices for
automation.
UNIT III COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL AND ROBOTICS 10
Fundamentals of NC technology; Computer Numerical Control (CNC); Direct Numerical
Control (DNC); NC part programming; Applications of Numerical Control.
Robot anatomy; robot classification; End effectors; Sensors in robotics; Introduction to robot
programming; Industrial applications of robot.
UNIT IV MATERIAL HANDLING AND FMS SYSTEMS 10
Introduction to material handling equipment; principle of material handling; automated guided
vehicle systems (AGV); rail guided vehicles; conveyor systems; Automatic Data Capture (ADC)
– bar code technology, RFID, magnetic stripes, optical character recognition (OCR).
Cellular manufacturing; Components of Flexible Manufacturing Systems; applications and
benefits of FMS.
UNIT V AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 8
Automated production lines; applications of automated production lines. Fundamentals of
automated assembly systems; design for automated assembly. Lean production; Agile
manufacturing.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will have the ability to understand automation, it’s importance and its
applications in manufacturing industries.
2. Students will select appropriate hardware and software for process automation.
3. Students will have the ability to develop the NC part program for the given part and
select the appropriate type of robot for a given industrial application.
4. Students will have the ability to select a suitable material handling and automatic data
201
capture systems for the implementation of FMS in industries.
5. Students will have the ability to understand the basics of automated production lines and
apply them for lean and agile manufacturing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing”, Pearson, 5th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. Springer, “Handbook of Automation”, 2009.

2. Richard L. Shell & Ernest L. Hall, “Handbook of Industrial Automation”, Marcel
Dekker, Inc., 2000.
202
OE 18004 QUALITY CONCEPTS AND TOOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To introduce basic quality concepts and tools to the students by making them study the
• importance of various tools and techniques through industry examples and case studies.
• To learn quality planning tools and its application in industries.
• To study lean management concepts and techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY 9
Introduction to quality – Perception of Quality – Quality Concept, Different Definitions and
Dimensions, Quality Control, Quality Assurance and Quality Management, Quality as Wining
Strategy - Statistical Process Control (SPC) - Strategic Management -Quality Management,
Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility.
UNIT II QUALITY TOOLS 9
Flow Charts – Histogram – Check sheet – Cause and Effect diagram – Run charts & Control
charts – Pareto charts – Scatter diagram –Spot charts – Pie charts
UNIT III NEW MANAGEMENT & PLANNING TOOLS 9
Affinity diagram – Interrelationship diagram – Tree diagram –Matrix diagram- Prioritization
matrix – Process decision program chart – Activity network diagram
UNIT IV QUALITY MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 10
Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - FMEA – Stages and types - PDCA/ PDSA – Design of
Experiments (DOE) - Six sigma – DMAIC – DMADV – Case studies in manufacturing and
service industries.
UNIT V LEAN MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS & TOOLS 8
Lean – definition – wastes - Value Stream Mapping (VSM) – Kanban system – Kaizen -Takt
Time -5S- Poka Yoke – One piece flow – Jidoka – Heijunka – Hoshin Kanri – Gemba –
Bottleneck and JIT.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students will become familiarize with the basics of quality concepts and its
importance.
• Students will be able to interpret the traditional tools of quality
• Will apply the new management and planning tools which are currently used in
industries.
• Illustrate how quality management techniques help industries by emphasizing their
applications with case studies.
• Students will be able to elaborate with examples the lean concepts, lean tools and
terminologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter Mears, “Quality Improvement tools and Techniques”, McGraw-Hill, 1995
203
REFERENCES :
1. Amitava Mithra, “Fundamentals of Quality control and Improvement”, Wiley, Third

Edition, 2008
2. Dale H. Besterfield, “Quality Control”, Pearson Education Asia, Eighth Edition, 2008.
3. James P. Womack and Daniel T. Jones, “Lean Thinking”, Simon & Schuster, 1996.
4. Jeffrey K. Liker, “The Toyota Way”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
5. Narayana and Sreenivasasn, “Quality Management- Concepts and tasks”, New Age
International, 1996.
WEB RESOURCES:
204
OE18006 REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
• To impart the concept, laws and methodologies of refrigeration system
• To apply the concepts and application of refrigeration systems
• To apply the concepts and application of air conditioning systems
(Use of standard refrigerant property Databook and Psychrometric chart permitted)

Introduction to Refrigeration – Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants
Desirable properties – Classification – Nomenclature – ODP & GWP.
UNIT II REFRIGERATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
Compressors, condensers, expansion devises, evaporators its types construction and working,
comparison and selection, refrigeration piping accessories and controls, thermal insulation
properties and classification, thickness of insulation.
UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY AND PSYCHROMETRIC PROCESS 9
properties of air, Daltons law of partial pressure, humidity, temperature, enthalpy of moist air,
temperature and humidity measuring instruments, plotting psychrometric chart, psychrometric
processes such as sensible heating, cooling, heating and humidification cooling and
dehumidification, chemical dehumidification, adiabatic saturation.
UNIT IV AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM 9
Window and Split type room Air conditioner Processes, Types and Working Principles-Concepts
of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF-Cooling load estimation (Descriptive only).
UNIT V AIRCONDITIONING LOAD CALCULATIONS 9

Airconditioning system-Load calculations and applied psychometrics: Internal heat gains, system
heat gains, break up of ventilation load and effective sensible heat factor, Bypass factor, cooling
load estimate.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
• The students can interpret the basic concepts of Refrigeration
• The students can solve analytical problems in Vapor Compression Refrigeration systems
• The students will be familiar with the various types of Refrigeration systems and its
psychrometric processes.
• The students can design and analyze various refrigeration and air conditioning systems
• The students can estimate the loads of Air conditioning systems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arora. C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi, 1988
2. Arora S.C & Domkundwar S, “Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning” Dhanpat Rai
Publication, 2009
3. Desai P.S, “Modern Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Khanna Publishers, 2004.
4. Manohar Prasad, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1983.
205
REFERENCES :
1. Ahmadul Ameen, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
2010.
2. Jordon and Prister, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India PVT
Ltd., NewDelhi, 2009.
3. Ramesh Arora ,” Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
4. Roy.J Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Pearson Education 2009.
5. Sapali S.N., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2009.
6. W.F.Stocker W.F and J.W.Jones J.W, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", McGraw-
Hill, 2009.
7. S.S Thispee S.S,” Refrigeration and air-conditioning”, Jaico Publications, 2009.
WEB RESOURCES:
206
OE 18008 THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC L T P C
DEVICES
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the knowledge of primary techniques for cooling electronics, heat-transfer
fundamentals, phase change, and heat transfer across solid interfaces.
• To enable the students to understand heat-generation in electronic equipment.
• To acquire the knowledge of thermal management equipment like heat sinks, interface
materials, heat spreaders including liquid and air cooling, phase change cooling,
Modes of heat transfer, Heat transfer coefficient. Newton’s law of cooling. Power transistors,
Power diodes, Central processing units (CPUs). Causes of heat generation in electronic systems,
Effects of excessive joint temperature, Need for cooling of electronic components.
UNIT II AIR COOLING 9
Trends in selection of cooling media and arrangements.
Application of extended surfaces: external fins, heat sinks, Trends in heat sink technology, forced
draught, fan sizing procedure and fan selection guidelines.
UNIT III LIQUID COOLING 9
Heat transfer compounds, Thermally conductive pastes, Epoxy resins, Liquid cooling of
electronic devices, Liquid coolants and alternative liquid coolants for high density electronics,
UNIT IV THERMAL COOLING 9
Heat pipes, Technical characteristics of heat pipes, Micro channel and two-phase cooling,
Cooling methods with phase change: Evaporation and Condensation.
UNIT V THERMOELECTRIC COOLING 9
Thermoelectric cooling: Thermoelectric cooling principles, Applications in electronics systems,
Peltier effect of cooling and semiconductors, Cooling of automotive electronics, Specification of
power dissipation, Trends in thermal management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will be able to apply the principle of heat transfer methods in cooling of
electronic components.
2. The students will be able to select and apply the cooling media for various air-cooling
methods.
3. The students will be able to select the appropriate methods and materials for liquid
cooling.
4. The students will be able to apply techniques of cooling methods for phase change
cooling process.
5. They will be able to recognize thermoelectric cooling principles and apply it in electronic
systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Younes Shabany, Heat Transfer: Thermal Management of Electronics, CRC Press; 2010.
207
REFERENCES:
1. Bejan A. and Kraus A. D., Heat Transfer Handbook, Wiley& Sons, Inc. 2003.
2. Ganesan, Sanka, and Pecht, Micheal, eds., Lead-free Electronics, John Wiley & Sons,
New Jersey, 2006.
3. Sergent, J., and Krum, A., Thermal Management Handbook for Electronic Assemblies,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1998
4. Yarin,L.P, Mosyak. A and Hetsroni. G., Fluid Flow, Heat Transfer and Boiling in Micro-
Channels., Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg ISBN 978-3-540-78754-9 and e-ISBN
978-3-540-78755-6., 2009.
5. Zumbrunnen D. A., Heat and Mass Transfer in Materials Processing and Manufacturing,
ASME, New Orleans, 1993.
WEB RESOURCES:
• https://andhrauniversity.edu.in
• https://nus.edu.sg
• https://www. sjsu.edu.
208
Value Added Courses
( To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)
VD18001 Advanced Gear Manufacturing Concepts L T P C
1 0 2 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To acquire knowledge about various types of Gears and its nomenclature.
• Understand the types of profiles generated in gear manufacturing
• To choose a particular type of machine for gear generating process
• To teach the students about the different gear generation methods by hands –on-Practice
• To define the fundamental principles, design of spur and helical gear
UNIT I INTRODUCTION ON SPUR AND HELICAL GEAR 8

Review on gear tooth nomenclature, law of gearing, interference and undercutting, contact ratio.
Gear tooth action, Gear tooth profiles –cycloidal and involutes profile, involutes profile
generation. Addendum modification factor, tipping and topping, backlash. Design and Various
manufacturing methods of straight tooth spur & helical gears.
UNIT II GEAR GENERATION MACHINE TOOLS 7
Simple Indexing, Compound Indexing, Differential indexing, Gear Shaping, Numerical problems
on gear milling, Gear Hobbing, Helical Gear cutting on milling machine.
UNIT III PRACTICE-SPUR AND HELICAL GEAR 15
Hands-on Practice: Gear Milling, Hobbing, Gear Shaping, Bevel Gear cutting, Worm wheel
cutting
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students can understand the fundamental principles, design of spur gear and helical gear.
2. Students can practice on spur and Helical gears manufacturing in the Machine shop
3. Students can do Design and Manufacturing of Spur and Helical Gear.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gitin M .Maitra, “Hand book of gear design” 2nd edition
REFERENCES :
1. AGMA-2001-D04, fundamental rating factor and calculation methods for involute spur
and helical gear teeth, AGMA,2001.
2. ISO-6336-2 Calculation of load capacity of spur and helical gears-Part2
3. ISO-6336, calculation of load capacity of spur and helical gears
WEB RESOURCES
NPTEL Course-Spur and Helical gear cutting -
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105219/
209
VD 18002 CONDITION MONITORING OF MACHINE TOOLS L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding condition monitoring and preventive maintenance of machines.
• Apply the basic concepts learned to know how vibrations affects the performance of
machine tools.
• To analyze tool wear and failure modes of machineries.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CONDITION MONITORING 6

Machinery Condition Monitoring - Present Status - Fault Prognosis - Future Needs - Principles of
Maintenance - Reactive Maintenance - Preventive Maintenance - Predictive Maintenance -
Enterprise Resource Planning - Bath Tub Curve - Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis
(FMECA).
UNIT II VIBRATION BASED CONDITION MONITORING 6
Principles of Vibration Monitoring - Misalignment Detection - Eccentricity Detection - Cracked
Shaft Bowed and Bent Shaft - Unbalanced Shaft – Looseness – Rub - Bearing Defects - Gear
Fault - Faults in Fluid Machines.
UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY &WEAR DEBRIS ANALYSIS 6
Thermal Imaging Devices - Use of IR Camera - Industrial Applications of Thermography -
Applications of Thermography in Condition Monitoring - Mechanisms of Wear - Detection of
Wear Particles - Common Wear Materials - Oil Sampling Technique - Oil Analysis - Limits of
Oil Analysis
UNIT IV MACHINE TOOL CONDITION MONITORING 6
Tool Wear - Sensor Fusion in Tool Condition Monitoring - Sensors for Tool Condition
Monitoring - A Tool Condition Monitoring System - Other Manufacturing Operations.
UNIT V ENGINEERING FAILURE ANALYSIS 6
Overview of Failure Analysis - Failure Modes - Failure Analysis - Failure Analysis Sampling
Guide.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Students will have the ability to understand and select an appropriate technique to
monitor the machine tools for preventing failures.
2. Students will have the ability to understand how vibration will affect the accuracy of
machine tools.
3. Students will have the ability to select the suitable technique to analyze and prevent tool
wear.
4. Students will have the ability to apply the different sensors and signal condition
monitoring methods for tool conditioning.
5. Students will have the ability to understand the various failure analysis techniques.
210
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amiya Ranjan Mohanty, “Machinery Condition Monitoring: Principles and Practices”,
CRC Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Jyoti Kumar Sinha, “Industrial Approaches in Vibration-Based Condition Monitoring”,

1st edition, CRC Press,2020.
2. Singiresu S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Manfred Weck, “Hand book of machine tools – Vol.3”, John Wiley &Sons, 1984.
WEB RESOURCES
211
VD 18003 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF JIGS AND
L T P C
FIXTURES
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To justify the need for productive tools in manufacturing
• To understand the design principles of jigs and fixtures
• To design and develop a drill Jig for a given product.
• To design and develop a Fixture for a given product
UNIT I BASICS OF JIGS AND FIXTURES, LOCATION AND 6

CLAMPING DEVICES
Introduction – Jigs and Fixtures –Difference between Jigs and Fixtures –Advantages of jigs and
Fixtures –Economy and cost - Elements of Jigs and Fixtures –Fool Proofing –Materials used in
Jigs and Fixtures -Degrees of Freedom –12 degrees of freedom –6point location principle –(or)
3-2-1 principle of location – Principles of location –location point –types of locators– pins and
studs –V block –cup and cone location points – adjustable locating points – special adjustable
stops – location from finished holes in the work –Diamond pin locator– Cam operated ‘V’
locator –Quick action ‘V ’ locator -Six point location of a three legged object – Location of a
cylinder on a v -block. Principles of clamping –types of clamping –lever clamp –hinged lamp –
two way clamp –swinging clamp – wedge clamp – eccentric clamping arrangement –quick
action clamp – Cam operated clamp –quarter turn screw –Toggle clamp –Pneumatic and
hydraulic clamps – Washers - ‘C’ washer – spherical and flat washers.
UNIT II BUSHINGS AND DRILL JIGS 12
Jig Bushing : Materials for jig bushing -press fit bushing –Fixed renewable bushing –slip
renewable bushing – liner bushing –screw bushing –miscellaneous type of drill bushings –
bushing specifications. Drill Jigs : Open drill jig plate drill jig –plate drill jig – template drill jig
– channel drill jig –turn over drill jig – angle plate drill jig –closed box drill jig – leaf drill jig –
post jig –indexing drill jig –universal drill jig -design of template and leaf jig. Design and
development of Drill Jigs for a Given product.
UNIT III FIXTURES 12

General principles of boring, lathe, milling and broaching fixtures- Grinding, planning and
shaping fixtures, assembly, Inspection and welding fixtures- Modular fixtures. Design and
development of fixtures for given component.
Total : 30 hours
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will understand the principles and elements of Jigs and Fixtures.
2. The students will be able to select a proper locator and clamping devices for a given
productive tool
3. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a drill jig
4. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a fixture for various
212
machining operations
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cyril Donaldson, George H Le Cain, V C Goold and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Joshi, P.H., “Jigs & Fixtures”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi 2004
3. Venkataraman. K., “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Press Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2005
REFERENCES :
1. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design Prentice Hall of India.

2. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/CHAPT_INTRODUCTION_TO_JIG
S_AND%20FIXTURES.pdf
4. https://www.rajagiritech.ac.in/Home/mech/Course_Content/Semester%20IV/ME%20220
%20Manufacturing%20Technology/Module%204.pdf
5. http://www.ignou.ac.in/upload/jig.pdf
213
VD 18004 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF PRESS TOOLS L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the sheet metal forming operations
• To develop a strip layout for a given product so as to utilize the material more economically
• To design and develop a simple, progressive and compound dies for a given product.
• To design and develop a forming die
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRESS TERMINOLOGY 8

Press operations – cutting and forming operations. Elastic recovery or spring back in sheet metal
operations. Press tool components – Rating of a press, Press working terminology, working of a
cutting die. Types of dies – Simple die, Compound die, Combination dies, Progressive dies,
Transfer dies. Principle of Metal cutting, Cutting Force estimation, Methods of reducing the
cutting force, Minimum diameter of piercing, Shut height of a press and shut height of a die
UNIT II DESIGN OF CUTTING DIES 11

Types of blanking die – Drop-through die, Inverted type die. Strip layout. 14 steps involved in
design of a die- How to Lay Out a Scrap Strip, How to Design Die Blocks, How to Design
Blanking Punches, How to Design Piercing Punches, How to Design Punch Plates, How to
Design Pilots, How to Design Gages, How to Design Finger Stops, How to Design Automatic
Stops, How to Design Strippers, How to Apply Fasteners, How to Select a Die Set, Dimensions
and Notes, The Bill of Material
UNIT III DESIGN OF FORMING DIES 11

Difference between bending and drawing – Blank development for above operations – Types of
Bending dies – Press capacity – Spring back – knockouts – direct and indirect – pressure pads –
Ejectors – Variables affecting Metal flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts – draw beads-
ironing – Design and development of bending, forming, drawing, reverse redrawing and
combination dies – Blank development for axisymmetric, rectangular and elliptic parts – Single
and double action dies.
Total : 30 hours
OUTCOMES:
1. The students will understand the various sheet metal cutting and forming operations
2. The students will be able to calculate the cutting force required for cutting and forming
operations
3. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a cutting die
4. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a Forming die
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cyril Donaldson, George H Le Cain, V C Goold and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Joshi P.H “Press tools - Design and Construction”, wheels publishing, 1996
214
3. Paquin. J.R., Die design Fundamentals, Industrial Press, 2006
REFERENCES :
1. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design Prentice Hall of India.

2. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://uni.edu/~rao/Mfg%20Tooling%20-10%20Prog%20Tools-2.pdf
2. http://ignou.ac.in/upload/bme059unit-3.pdf
3. http://staff.uny.ac.id/sites/default/files/pendidikan/aan-ardian-mpd/1g-handbook-die-design-
2nd-edition.pdf
4. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/Tool_Engineering_and_Design/CHAPTER5.pdf
5. https://www.academia.edu/6009091/DIE_DESIGN_FUNDAMENTALS
215
VD18005 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND TESTING L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide in depth knowledge of engine testing and evaluation techniques.
• To understand the heat release from an IC engine and use of flow visualization
techniques
UNIT I ENGINE DYNAMOMETER AND TESTS EQUIPMENT 12
Engine dynamometers, data acquisition, fuel consumption meter, air fuel ratio measurement, oil
consumption measurement, temperature and pressure measurement, humidity measurement
UNIT II ADVANCED ENGINE TESTING 10
Use of special equipment, fuel injection pressure, Gas analyzer, combustion pressure, needle lift,
heat balance, gas exchange process, Spray and combustion photography, swirl measurement, Gas
chromatography
UNIT III ADVANCED MEASUREMENTS 8
Interferometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer, Hot wire Anemometer, Particle Image Velocimetry.
Flame Ionization Detector, Non-Dispersive Infrared Analyzer,
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Students will be familiar with the process of engine testing and emission measurements.
• Students will get an exposure on the applicability of data acquisition system.
• Students will be able to apply advanced techniques for engine measurement and flow
visualization techniques in IC engines.
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan. V, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, 2013.
2. Holman. J.P, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw – Hill Inc., 2001.
3. Wolfgang Merzkirch, Flow Visualisation, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 1987
4. William.H. Crouse, Automotive Engines, McGraw Hill Publishers, 1985.
5. Ellinger, H.E, Automotive Engines, Prentice Hall Publishers, 1992.
6. Obert.E.F., Internal Combustion Engine analysis and Practice, International Text Book
Co., Scranton, Pennsylvania,1988.
WEB RESOURCE:
• nptel.ac.in/ courses/112104033/112107242
216
VD18006 GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCE L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To develop a thorough understanding and interpreting Engineering drawings of various
mechanical components and assemblies
• To create the Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) system of symbols, rules
and definitions used to define the geometry of mechanical parts.
• To create the knowledge in different kind of tolerances and its symbols
UNIT I GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING SYMBOLS AND GENERAL RULES 5

Introduction - Dimensioning Symbols - Geometric Characteristics - Modifying Symbols - Basic
Rules.
UNIT II DATUMS 5
Introduction - Datum Identification - Three-Plane Concept - Flat-Customized Datum Reference
Frame - Datum Targets - Three-Plane Concept - Circular-Partial Datums - Datums of Size-
Pattern of Features.
UNIT III TOLERANCES OF LOCATION 10
Concentricity – Symmetry - Position Introduction - Position Theory - Position of Multiple
Cylindrical Features - Composite Positional Tolerancing - Two Single-Segment Feature Control
Frames - Multiple Patterns Located by Basic-Dimensions and Related to the Same Datums -
Patterns Positions From a Datum of Size Introduction - Zero Tolerancing - Projected Tolerance
Zone – Non cylindrical Features - Bidirectional Tolerancing - Coaxial Features.
UNIT IV FORM AND ORIENTATION 5
Tolerances of Form-Straightness – Flatness - Circularity- Cylindricity - Tolerances of
Orientation – Perpendicularity – Angularity - Parallelism.
UNIT V PROFILE AND RUNOUT TOLERANCES 5
Profile of a surface and line -Part Calculations - Circular and Total Runout - Runout
Calculations.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. The students will define various applications of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance
standards and its principles.
2. The students will be able to identify datum features and determine their order of
precedence
3. The students will apply suitable documentation procedures with Geometric Dimensioning
and Tolerance.
4. The students will read and interpret the production drawings used in industrial application
5. The students will perform design calculations associated with Geometric Dimensioning
and Tolerance.
217
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alex Krulikowski, “Fundamentals of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, Delmar
Publishers, Second Edition, 2012.
2. P.S. Gill “Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, S.K. Kataria and Sons; 2013.
REFERENCES :
1. Daniel E. Puncochar, “Interpretation of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”,

Industrial Press, New York, Third Edition, 2010.
WEB RESOURCE:
https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112106179/lec1-14
218
VD18007 KAIZEN AND IT APPLICATIONS L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To provide an overview of Kaizen
• To provide an overall knowledge on Implementing of Kaizen.
• To provide knowledge on Kaizen Tools
UNIT I HISTORY & INTRODUCTION TO KAIZEN 6
What is kaizen; why kaizen; History of Kaizen – Definition of Kaizen, philosophy; Objective of
Kaizen/Lean ; Overview of lean production system – Identify areas for improvement -Value
stream mapping VSM
UNIT II IMPLEMENTATION OF KAIZEN 7
Planning and Preparation – Five steps of identify the business case, Set goals, Select the team,
Collect baseline data, Plan to support the Kaizen activity: study about basic founding element;
steps to implement kaizen – Schedule for Kaizen, Get employees involved - Find problems –
Identify waste - Create a solution - Test the solution - Analyze the results - Standardize - Repeat
UNIT III TOYOTA PRODUCTION SYSTEM 7
Principles of Toyota production system – Why Toyota uses kaizen techniques; culture and
management philosophy of Toyota; Main ideas for developed for Toyota way; Developing
kaizen ‘eyes’ – Role of management in the system – critical success factor.
UNIT IV KAIZEN TOOLS 7
Introduction, areas of study under ergonomics, system approach to ergonomics model, man-
machine system. Components of man-machine system and their functions. Design of work
places, influence of climate on human efficiency. Influence of noise, vibration and light
UNIT V CASE STUDY 3
Toyota Production system – Related to Continuous Improvement
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will illustrate about identifying areas of improvement in a process.
2. Will perform the steps involved in kaizen activities within an industry
3. Students will compare different kaizen tools for continuous improvement.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. George, M. L., Rowlands, D., Price, M., & Maxey, J. (2005). The Lean Six Sigma Pocket
Toolbook. New York: McGraw-Hill. ISBN: 0-07-144119-0
2. Munro, R. A., Maio, M. J., Nawaz, M. B., Ramu, G., & Zrymiak, D. J. (2008). The
Certified Six Sigma Green Belt Handbook. Milwaukee: ASQ Quality Press. ISBN: 978-
0-87389-698-6.
REFERENCES :
1. David Brunt and David Taylor, “Manufacturing Operations and Supply Chain
Management the Lean Approach”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.
219
2. Robert Maure - The Spirit of Kaizen: Creating Lasting Excellence One Small Step at a
Time Hardcover – Masaki Iman, Kaizen Institute, 2012
3. Jaime Villafuerte, Jon Miller, and Mike Wroblewski - Creating a Kaizen Culture: Align
the Organization, Achieve Breakthrough Results, and Sustain the Gains - McGraw-Hill
Education 2013
4. Peter F. Drucker - The Practice of Management – 2016
5. P. James Womack - Lean Thinking: Banish Waste and Create Wealth in Your
Corporation - 2003
6. Jaime Villafuerte - Creating a Kaizen Culture : Align the Organization, Achieve
Breakthrough Results, and Sustain the Gains – 2016
7. Jeffrey K. Liker - The Toyota Way to Service Excellence – 2017
WEB RESOURCES:
220
VD18008 KINEMATIC ANALYSIS OF MECHANICAL LINKS L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To develop a thorough understanding of the various mechanisms and its design with an
ability to effectively use the various mechanisms in real life problems.
• This course will impart knowledge on planar motions generated from coupler curves.
• This course focuses on various synthesis and graphical methods for formation of new
mechanisms
UNIT I ADVANCED KINEMATICS OF PLANE MOTION 10

Introduction to plane motion. The Inflection circle, Euler – Savary Equation, Bobillier’s
Construction, Collineation axis, Hartmann’s Construction, Inflection circle for the relative
motion of two moving planes, Application of the Inflection circle to kinematic analysis,
Polode curvature in the four-bar mechanism, coupler motion.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO SYNTHESIS-GRAPHICAL METHODS 10
The Four bar linkage, guiding a body through Two distinct positions, Guiding a body through
Three distinct positions - Function generation- General discussion - Velocity – Pole method,
Path generation: Hrones’s and Nelson’s motion Atlas, Roberts’s theorem
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO SYNTHESIS – ANALYTICAL METHODS 10
Function Generation: Freudenstien’s Equation, Precision point approximation, Path
Generation: Synthesis of Four-bar Mechanisms for specified instantaneous condition
TOTAL:30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
1. Students will compete to execute kinematic analysis of a mechanical linkage.
2. Students will effectively apply the principles of Coupler curves in real time
applications.
3. Students will be able to perform synthesis for multiple specified positions of a linkage.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John J. Uicker, Gordon R. Pennock and Joseph E. Shigley, “Theory of Machines and
Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, Fourth Edition, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Amitabh Ghosh and Ashok Kumar Mallik, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”,
McGraw Hill, Fifth edition, 2019.
2. Charles E Wilson and J. Peter Sadler, “Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery”,
Pearson, Third Edition, 2008.
3. Henry T. Brown Dover,“507 Mechanical Movements: Mechanisms and Devices”,
Publications Inc, First Edition, 2005.
4. Kevin Russell, Qiong Shen and Rajpal S. Sodhi, “Kinematics and Dynamics of
221
Mechanical Systems”, Implementation in MATLAB® and Sim Mechanics®, ,CRC
Press, Second Edition, 2018.
5. Robert L. Norton,“Design of Machinery: An Introduction to the Synthesis and
Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines”, McGraw-Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
WEBRESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_me21/course
222
VC 18004 DESIGN THINKING AND PROTOTYPING L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To apply design thinking principles in arriving at innovative engineering solutions for problems
relevant to society.
SYLLABUS
The course will use a combination of lectures and hands-on project work. The project will give an
opportunity to come up with an innovative engineering solution to problems or challenges
particular to our society.
1. Concepts of design thinking and human centered design thinking.

2. Identifying societal problems using indirect and qualitative research.
3. Forming teams and assignments of major societal problems and arriving at sound concept
hypotheses, and solution using brainstorming sessions. Societal problems such as water
management, energy sources, basic amenities (health, education, food, clean water,
sanitation, connectivity etc), organic farming, livelihood etc. will be assigned as projects.
4. Developing a prototype that allows for meaningful feedback in a real-world environment.
5. Presenting the developed prototype in front of a technically qualified audience.
Evaluation will be done as per following details.
OUTCOMES:
• Students will be able to apply design thinking principles in arriving innovative design.
• Students will be able to solve unique societal problems.
• Students will be able to make prototypes.
• Students will be able to work as a team member or lead interdisciplinary engineering teams.
• Students will be able to demonstrate the product prototype to technically qualified audience.
223
VC18005 BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
• To provide Knowledge on Self-discovery and Problem identification.
• To provide Skill set on Identifying customer segment and Practice on Business Model.
• To understand the Market, Sales and support.
UNIT I Self-Discovery & Problem Identification 6

Orientation of Entrepreneurship – Case Study – activity – Effectuation – Principles of
Effectuation – Identifying Entrepreneur skill.
Problem Identification – Design thinking – look for solution – activity – Brain storming.
UNIT II Customer & Business Model 6
Identifying customer segment, understanding the market – Product selection –activity – value
proposition canvas.
Identify the Problem, Solution and Risk identification – Activity – Business model.
UNIT III Validation and Resources 6
Build a Minimum Viable Product (MVP) – validation and launching of MVP –activity – MVP
Interview.
Cost – Revenue – Pricing – Profitability – Sources of finance – activity – Bootstrap Finance –
Leadership – Identifying Co-founders and Hiring a Team – activity –Pitching about a venture
UNIT IV Market and sales 6

Positioning and branding – network and channels – sales planning – activity – selling skill.
UNIT V Support 6
Project Management – Project tracking – Basics of Business regulations – Activity – capstone
project.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
• Students will Acquire knowledge and Practice on Self Discovery and Problem
Identification.
• Students will Understand the concept of Identifying the Customer and Business model
• Students can practice on validation and launching of MVP.
• Student can Acquire knowledge on marketing and sales.
• Students can Practice on Project management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New
Delhi, 2013.
2. Donald F Kuratko, “ Entreprenuership – Theory, Process and Practice”, 9th edition,
Cengage Learning 2014
REFERENCES :
1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013.
2. Mathew J Manimala, “Entrepreneurship Theory at Cross Roads: paradigms and Praxis”,

2nd Edition Dream Tech, 2005.
224
Web Resource:
https://learnwise.wfglobal.org/#/IN/en/courses
225
MC 18001 INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND SOCIETY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To know about Indian constitution and fundamental rights.
• To know about central and state government functionalities in India.
• To know about Judicial system and Election commission of India.
Historical Background – Philosophical foundations of the Indian Constitution – Preamble –
Schedules – Amendments.
UNIT II FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS AND FUNDAMENTAL DUTIES OF THE 8
CITIZEN
Union and Territories – Citizenship - Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy –
Fundamental Duties – Directive Principles of state policy.
UNIT III STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF CENTRAL GOVERNMENT 8
Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – Powers of President,
Vice President, Prime Minister – Cabinet ministers – Parliament.
UNIT IV STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF STATE GOVERNMENT 8
State Government – Structure and Functions – Powers of Governor, Chief Minister, Cabinet
ministers – State Legislature
UNIT V STRUCTURE OF JUDICIAL SYSTEM AND MAJOR 10
FUNCTIONARIES
Supreme Court of India - Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts –
Judicial Review – Case studies. Election Commission of India and its functions.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO CO statement Weightage
CO - 1 Enhance human values, create awareness about law enactment and 10 %
importance of Constitution
CO – 2 To Understand the Fundamental Rights and Fundamental Duties of the 30%
Indian Citizen to instill morality, social values, honesty, dignity of life
and their social Responsibilities.
CO - 3 To Understand the powers and functions of Central Government. 20%
CO – 4 To Understand the powers and functions of State Government. 20%
CO - 5 To Understand the powers and functions of Judicial systems and 20%
Election commission of India.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi.
2. R.C. Agarwal, (1997) “Indian Political System”, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
226
3. Maciver and Page, “Society: An Introduction Analysis “, Mac Milan India Ltd., New
Delhi.
4. K.L.Sharma, (1997) “Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes”, Jawaharlal
Nehru University, New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi.
2. U.R.Gahai, “Indian Political System “, New Academic Publishing House, Jalaendhar.
3. R.N. Sharma, “Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
227

Mec R2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mec R2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

COURSE CONTACT Fixed/

(Recommended by BoS - Meeting held on 28.07.2018)

1 ME18711 Comprehension EEC 2 0 0 2 1 F

2 ME18713 Mechatronics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F

1 ME18811 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12 Nil F

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I, IV, V (To be chosen during ODD SEMESTER)

1 ME18001 Automobile Engineering

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II, III, VI (To be chosen during EVEN SEMESTER)

1 ME18002 3D Printing and Design

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (Can be chosen whenever offered)

1. SE18001 Mathematics for AI and ML (Common to all branches except MR)

2. OE18004 Quality concepts and tools OE 3 3 0 0 3

Value Added Courses

OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY OTHER DEPARTMENT

Open Electives offered in ODD Semester

2. OE181003 Fundamentals of Automotive Air Conditioning AUT

3. OE18201 Introduction to Biofuels and Bioenergy BIO

5. OE18205 Introduction to Bioinformatics and Computational Biology BIO

8. OE18301 Waste to Energy CHE

9. OE18303 Industrial Safety CHE

10. OE18305 Composite Materials CHE

15. OE18501 Basic Operating System CSE

16. OE18503 Basics on Cyber Security and Ethical Hacking CSE

17. OE18505 Introduction to Internet of Things CSE

18. OE18507 Multimedia & Animation Techniques CSE

19. OE18509 Python Programming CSE

20. OE18601 Electrical Machines and Applications EEE

21. OE18603 Control system Engineering EEE

23. OE18607 Electric Vehicle Technology EEE

25. OE18701 Autotronics ECE

26. OE18703 Sensing Techniques ECE

28. OE18801 IT essentials for engineers INT

29. OE18803 Internet of Everything INT

30. OE18805 Foundation on Mobile App Development INT

31. OE18901 Elements of Marine Engineering MAR

32. OE18903 Marine Propulsion MAR

34. OE18003 Elements of Mechanical Components MEC

35. OE18005 Industrial Engineering and Management MEC

Open Electives offered in EVEN Semester

3. OE18106 Fundamentals of Automotive Pollution and Control Methods AUT

4. OE18202 Introduction to Food Manufacturing BIO

6. OE18206 Introduction to Tissue Engineering BIO

8. OE18210 Basic Bio-pharmaceutical Technology BIO

10. OE18304 Solid Waste Management CHE

11. OE18306 Plant Utilities CHE

12. OE18308 Green Energy CHE

13. OE18310 Energy Management CHE

14. OE18402 Integrated Solid Waste Management CVE

16. OE18502 Artificial Intelligence Basics CSE

18. OE18506 Internet Programming CSE

19. OE18508 Introduction to Cloud & Big Data Analytics CSE

21. OE18602 Industrial Automation EEE

22. OE18604 MEMS and Nano Devices EEE

23. OE18606 Renewable Energy Systems EEE

24. OE18608 Indian Power Grid EEE

25. OE18610 Power Converters EEE

26. OE18702 Consumer Electronics ECE

27. OE18704 Introduction to Communication Systems ECE

29. OE18802 Embedded and Real Time Systems INT

32. OE18808 AI for Android INT